JP2023076129A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1 can be controlled to be in an advantageous state (e.g., big winning game state) advantageous to a player, and includes a first light emission unit (center lamp 46) and a second light emission unit (chance lamp 48) that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to be in the advantageous state. There are cases where the first light emission unit emits light and where the second light emission unit emits light, when a game ball enters a predetermined start port (first start port 11) to be won.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, the movable body under the starting opening is rotated according to the ball entering the first starting opening, and the starting opening There is known a game machine capable of executing a win-time effect of blinking a lower lamp.

JP 2019-150713 A

However, like the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine that performs an effect in response to the entry of a ball into the starting hole, in order to improve the game amusement.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
Controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when a predetermined starting hole is won, the first light emitting unit emits light and the second light emitting unit emits light.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game through the performance.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view which shows a 2nd big prize-winning apparatus etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in a standby state, and (B) is the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in operation. It is a front view. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side; FIG. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. (A) is a table showing general-purpose random numbers, and (B) is a table showing special-related random numbers. (A) is an example of a hit determination table, (B) is an example of a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is an example of a ready-to-win determination table. It is an example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a prefetch determination table. It is an example of a jackpot game control table. It is explanatory drawing of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the SP reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of movable body production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of operation effects; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a front view of the game board unit according to the characteristic portion of the pachinko game machine PY1. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side related to the characteristic portion of the pachinko game machine PY1. It is a jackpot game control table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1. It is a variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1, and is a variation pattern determination table of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows the specific example of battle reach. It is a figure which shows the specific example of story reach. It is a look-ahead determination table related to the characteristic part of the pachinko game machine PY1, and is a look-ahead determination table of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state. It is a lottery table of holding change production. It is a lottery table of pending change timing. It is a lottery table for the navel lamp lighting effect. This is a lottery table for a chance lamp lighting effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of chance lamp light emission production|presentation. It is a table showing an execution example of the effect in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a case where a holding change effect and navel lamp light emission effect are performed at the time of starting winning. It is a figure which shows the case where chance lamp light emission production|presentation is performed at the time of start winning. It is a diagram showing a case where the holding change effect, navel lamp light emission effect, and chance lamp light emission effect are performed at the time of starting winning. It is a diagram showing a case where a chance lamp light emission effect is performed at the time of starting winning, and a suspension change effect and a belly button light emission effect are performed at the time of shift display of the suspension display. It is a lottery table of the chance lamp lighting effect according to the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a lottery table of hold change scenarios according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a lottery table of navel lamp emission effect at the time of winning according to the third embodiment. It is a table|surface which shows the execution example of the production|presentation in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the over prize ball prevention function with which the gaming machine of 4th Embodiment is provided. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of over-prizing abnormality, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize notice image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state. (A) is a diagram showing when a special reset switch is pressed down, and (B) is a diagram showing when the customer waiting state has passed for one hour. 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of difference ball number measurement processing. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. 6 is a flowchart of output processing; 9 is a flowchart of outer-end signal output processing; It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference ball number is displayed with a 7 segment display in the modification of 4th Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a determination table of the big hit design type and the small hit design type according to the fifth embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the big hit and the small hit. It is a determination table of the lost symbol type according to the fifth embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the lost symbols. It is a table|surface which shows the kind of hit determination table based on 5th Embodiment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the release pattern table of an electric chew. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the fifth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of game state management processing according to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure etc. which show the display screen of each production mode which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the RUSH rush production|presentation which concerns on 5th Embodiment.

EMBODIMENT OF THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiment of the gaming machine of this invention is concretely described with reference to drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, by describing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, or a member, the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code is omitted or may be abbreviated. Further, in any flow chart described later, a plurality of processes in a plurality of arbitrary steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or executed in parallel as long as there is no contradiction in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. and

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU, which will be described later, is mounted, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board attachment frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. 23 t of transparent plates should just be able to visually recognize the game area 6 from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball for firing the game ball (the amount that the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k. A lower decorative body 36 projecting greatly forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper plate 34 is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. A lower tray 35 is provided in the center of the lower part of the front face of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34 .

A first input device (hereinafter referred to as “normal button”) 40 that can be pressed downward is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . A second input device (hereinafter referred to as a "special button") 41 that can be pressed downward is provided on the right decorative body 32 formed so as to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. . The normal button 40 is configured to vibrate. That is, the normal button 40 has a built-in vibration mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40. When the vibration motor included in the vibration mechanism is driven, the normal button 40 vibrates to the extent that the player can visually recognize it. 40 is designed to vibrate. As for the vibrating mechanism for vibrating the normal button 40, a known configuration can be appropriately adopted. The normal button 40 is an example of an operation unit and an example of a vibrator.

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 formed so as to protrude forward from the upper surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 consists of a left speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a right speaker 52R arranged on the right side. Frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 on the front side of the lower decorative body 36 . Further, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached as a performance device for increasing the interest in the game on the upper side of the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m. The frame movable device 58 is composed of a left frame movable device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R arranged on the right side.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B for defining a game area 6 in which game balls can flow down is formed so as to protrude forward. A substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is also formed outside the inner wall portion 1B so as to protrude forward.

A game area 6 surrounded by an inner wall portion 1B, an outer wall portion 1C, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall portion 1B and the outer wall portion 1C.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a large number of game pegs (not shown). The game nail is a game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 through a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, In addition, a route is configured to moderately guide the player to the second prize-winning port 15 or the like. In addition, starting openings such as the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 are referred to as entry openings, and large winning openings such as the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15 are referred to as special winning openings or specific winning openings. and the gate can be referred to as a passage opening or a passage area.

A center frame (center decoration) 61 is provided near the center of the game area 6 to decorate the periphery of the opening 1A. The center frame 61 is provided with a stage capable of guiding a game ball to a first starting port 11, which will be described later, and a warp capable of guiding a game ball to the stage.

In addition, in the game area 6, there is a first start winning device 11D formed with a first start opening 11 into which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device 11D that enables or disables entry into the second start opening 12. A starting winning device (so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided.

The first start winning device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball enters. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 is the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of special figure 1 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 1 lottery" It is also called) and the variable display of special figure 1 is triggered. Also, when the game ball enters the first start hole 11, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D has an actuatable electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position where it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加Then, when the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the “open state” of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the fact that the electric tube opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D. In addition, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also called "the electric tube 12D opens", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is called "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

The winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of special figure 2 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 2 lottery" It is also called) and the variable display of special figure 2 is triggered. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a general winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 10 into which game balls can enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (three in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. Passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") lottery (that is, normal pattern random number acquisition and determination: hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery") and the variable display of the normal pattern. It's becoming The power chew 12D is released by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game accompanied by the opening of the electric chew 12D.

Also, the game area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first big winning hole 14 into which a game ball can enter. The first big prize winning device 14D has a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated in an open state and a closed state. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to open/close the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state to close the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the first big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a second big winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second big winning opening 15 into which a game ball can enter. The second big winning device 15D has an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big winning opening 15. - 特許庁The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. Only when the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second big winning opening 15 is also called "closed state". In this manner, the second big winning opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the second big winning device 15D will be described in detail. Inside the second big winning device 15D, a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a capable of detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 and allowing the game ball to pass downward is provided. It is

A specific area 16 through which a game ball can pass (enter) and a non-specific area 17 are provided in the downstream area of the second big winning hole sensor 15a. A game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 15a is sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The distribution device 16D includes a distribution member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving a distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k in the front view of FIG. 3A) that prevents passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the specific region 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific region 16 directly above it). When the sorting member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible for the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. , passes through the non-specific region 17 . The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning hole 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: swinging in the front view of FIG. The left end of the dividing member 16k is positioned slightly to the left of the right end of the specific region 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific region 16 directly above it, and the specific region 16 is open directly above it). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning port 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Only in a predetermined round game (for example, 16R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can be changed to the second state. In addition, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect game balls passing through (entering) the respective areas 16 and 17 and pass the game balls downward. .

Only one of the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D can be provided as long as the game is not hindered. In addition, it is possible to provide two large winning devices, such as the first large winning device 14D, which do not have a specific area or a sorting device, depending on the playability. Also, although the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D are provided, depending on the playability, only the first big winning device 14D may be used, or only the second big winning device 15D may be used. It is possible to use It should be noted that in the case of the configuration using only the first big winning device 14D, the processing related to the second big winning device 15D is not performed, and in the case of the configuration using only the second big winning device 15D, , the first big winning device 14D is not performed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are two game balls for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. An out port 19 is provided. Also, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 capable of emitting light.

By the way, the game area 6 where the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B (second game area) on the right side. can. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, a flow path through which a game ball can flow down when a game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and a game ball flows down when a game ball is shot right-handed. A possible flow path is referred to as the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of game nails and the like.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starter opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, and a second big winning opening 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right, thereby passing through the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, the general winning opening 10, and the first big winning opening 14. Or, you can aim to win a prize to the second big prize opening 15 .

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first big winning opening 14, and second big winning opening 15) It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

In addition, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the special figure 1, a special figure 2 indicator 81b that variably displays the special figure 2, and a general figure that is variably displayed. A normal map display 82 is included. In addition, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the number of special figures 1 pending (U1: the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), which will be described later. And the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b which displays the special figure 2 reservation number (U2: the number that the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b is withheld) which will be described later is included.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 as a trigger. In the following description, special figures 1 and 2 are collectively called special figures or special symbols, and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively called special figure lotteries. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure indicator 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The special figure to be stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of kinds of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (a special figure of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15) are opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed. In addition, the game state in which the jackpot game is performed is called a jackpot game state. The jackpot gaming state is an example of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The special figure indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special drawing indicator 81 displays "□□■■□□■■" (□: lighting, ■ : off), the jackpot pattern consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, the special figure indicator 81 has a lost figure composed of lighting only the rightmost LED, such as "■■■■■■■□". display. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, various random numbers (an example of judgment information) for performing a special drawing lottery are generated. may be obtained. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers obtained by winning (entering the game ball) to the first start port 11 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and winning the game ball to the second start port 12 Various random numbers obtained by (entry) are referred to as "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 relation random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 relation random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. To the number of special figures 1 reservation that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figures 1 reservation) and the number of special figures 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figures 2 reservations) has an upper limit (4 in this embodiment). The upper limit of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be "none". In the following, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation", and the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". In addition, the special figure 1 relation random number and the special figure 2 relation random number are collectively referred to as "special figure relation random number".

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, specifically, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game, the variable display of the special figure (or the right of the special figure lottery) for the winning can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, the digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special figure relation random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

And the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83 . Each of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the special figure reservation number by lighting the LED for the special figure reservation number. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The normal map to be stopped and displayed (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal map selected from a plurality of types of normal map lottery. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (predetermined stop mode normal pattern, ie, winning pattern), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The general pattern indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the general pattern according to the results of the general pattern lottery by its lighting mode. When the result of the normal pattern lottery is winning, the normal pattern display 82 displays a winning pattern composed of lighting of both LEDs such as "□□" (□: lighting, ■: lighting off). In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, a losing pattern composed of only the right LED lighting is displayed, such as "■□". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

Also, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of determination information) for performing a general pattern lottery may be obtained. This random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, which will be described later, on condition that the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is not being executed. An upper limit (four in the present embodiment) is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106 (the number of general pattern reservations). The upper limit of the number of normal pattern reservations can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be set to "none". In the following, the normal symbol random number obtained by passing the game ball through the gate 13 is also referred to as "normal symbol related random number". In addition, in the present embodiment, the general figure reservation display for displaying the number of general figure reservations is not provided, but the general figure reservation display may be added to the indicators 8. As the normal figure reservation display, for example, it is possible to adopt the same configuration as the special figure reservation display 83.

Next, the production unit 1U attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The production unit 1U is formed by unitizing a plurality of devices that mainly produce production. An image display device 50, a first panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on-board movable device") 55, and a second panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "under-board movable device") 56 are mounted on the effect unit 1U.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section (display screen) 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. Note that the image display device 50 may be another display device such as a plurality of liquid crystal displays or an EL (Electro Luminescence) display as long as it can display images. may

The on-board movable device 55 includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k configured to be movable along the display section 50a. The under-board movable device 56 includes a decorated under-board movable body 56k configured to be movable along the display section 50a.

FIG. 5(A) schematically shows how the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 drives, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered with the lowered upper board movable body 55k or the raised lower board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls the game profit (progress of the game), and a game effect (special figure fluctuation effect, holding effect, operation effect, jackpot) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 game effects, etc.) and performances such as customer waiting effects (hereinafter referred to as "sub-control board") 120, and a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls. It is provided further behind the image display device 50 . The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls the game. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section (sub-control section) that controls the effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161, which will be described later. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various It is sufficient if the production can be controlled.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 that can be pressed. RAM clear switch 191 (specific operation means), when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as high probability state, the number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the big hit) to the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on a power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 191 is an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed down, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate. can be

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered off. A power switch 193 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 193 switches on/off of power. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like. The game RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage unit 107, and the non-erasable storage unit 107 is provided with a total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, a total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and a difference number storage unit 107c. It is In the non-erasing storage unit 107, the game CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents even if the RAM clear is executed. The non-erasing storage unit 107 (total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, difference number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) (see FIG. 8). As shown in FIG. 9, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and has a total of 32 lighting (emitting) portions. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 are composed of eight lighting portions (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so as to represent numbers "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as operating means when setting a set value corresponding to the probability of judging a big win. The inside of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, by rotating the setting key cylinder 180 to the rotation position and turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 191, the setting mode is shifted to a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can do. Then, in this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in this pachinko game machine PY1, only one kind of set value, ie, "1" is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". When the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position while the setting mode is set, the setting mode is terminated and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in FIG. 8, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, it can be said that the special reset switch 181 is an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be detailed later. Also, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals.

Various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a general winning opening sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning opening sensor 14a, a second It includes a big winning hole sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a.

The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a is provided for each general winning hole 10 . The gate sensor 13 a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The first big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14 . The second big winning hole sensor 15 a detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 . The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection.

Although not shown in FIG. 6, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor for detecting all game balls flowing down the game area 6 (total number of shot balls). Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the outlet sensor is provided in the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter game balls into various prize winning openings 10, 11, 12, 14, and 15. FIG. Each of the sensors described above outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 when the gaming ball is detected.

The various sensors MS include a front door open sensor for detecting opening of the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor for detecting opening of the front frame 23m with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 . When the front frame sensor detects that the front frame 23m is open, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100. FIG. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s, a first big winning solenoid 14s, a second big winning solenoid 15s and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big winning opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big winning opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. , and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out the prize balls. , Paying out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73 a for counting the game balls, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73 a is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch 72 a detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Further, the firing device 72 is connected with a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid 72s so that the game ball is shot with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Also, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160 . That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 . The external terminal board 160 transmits an outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to an external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine PY1. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the game state, and information indicating an error or irregularity (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Also, the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, but the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

In addition, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the sub-control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 100 , the sub-control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control details) by the main control board 100 . The connection between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 120 . That is, between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. In the effect control microcomputer 121, an effect ROM 123 storing programs and the like for controlling effects as the game progresses by the main control board 100, an effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123 are stored. It includes a performance CPU 122 that executes the program.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Also, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 . The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 is operated by the power supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply, the power board 190 operates. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the sub control board 120 is based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the image display device to the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140. 50 display control is performed. The connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 enables both transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It has Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including background images) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, effect sound, etc. from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161. to output

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control circuit 161 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120 . Also, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Also, the sub-control board 120 performs lighting control of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100 .

Various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 has been pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each of the detection switches 40a and 41a outputs a signal to the sub-control board 120 according to the content of detection. The type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include an on-board drive motor 55m that drives the on-board movable device 55, an under-board drive motor 56m that drives the under-board movable device 56, and a frame movable device 58. A frame drive motor 58m and the like are included. The effect control microcomputer 121 can drive these motors to cause each movable device to perform a predetermined operation. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151 . A vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the normal button 40 is also connected to the sub-control board 120 . The type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, and the like. The effect control microcomputer 121 can cause each lamp to emit light. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, light emission color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of each lamp and operation control of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. Also, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Main Games by Gaming Machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. The tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 17 are general ones for explanation of this item, and tables other than these are shown in the explanation of "features of the pachinko game machine PY1" to be described later. In this case, it is assumed that the table is used in the pachinko game machine PY1. However, in the description of the "features of the pachinko gaming machine PY1" to be described later, it is assumed that the table shown in this item is used for the configuration that does not show a separate table. It is also assumed that the configuration showing another table in the description of "Characteristic part" can be changed to the table shown in this item.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts a normal drawing lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is referred to as "formation of normal figure start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a general-pattern related random number when the general-pattern start condition is satisfied in performing such a series of games (normal-pattern lottery, variable display of the general-pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 10(A), normal pattern random numbers are included in general pattern related random numbers to be obtained. The normal symbol random number is a random number for performing hit determination. The random number is also called judgment information. Random numbers are appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) according to a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 11(A). The hit determination table is associated with game states, which will be described later. That is, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time-saving hit determination table) used in a non-time-saving state and a hit determination table (time-saving hit determination table) used in a time-saving state. In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number) is distributed to the hit and the loss, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 judges whether it is a win or a loss by judging the obtained normal symbol random number according to the hit judgment table. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for performing the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. If the result of the hit determination is hit, basically, the hit pattern is displayed in a variable display of the normal pattern and stopped. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate. Also, the hit determination table does not need to be divided for each game state.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern according to a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 11(B). The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-short-time normal pattern determination table) used in the non-short-time state and the normal-fluctuation pattern determination table used in the short-time state ( There is a time-saving normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table). In addition, it is not necessary to divide the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for each game state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure of loss (losing general figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be a normal figure fluctuation pattern, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning pattern For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed For the variable display of the figure, a normal figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the normal figure fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds. The variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived).

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. And each of these elements is associated with a game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game according to the auxiliary game control table as shown in FIG. 11(C) based on the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. It should be noted that the number of times of opening and the opening time in each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 makes the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time (time (for example, 0.08 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is held for a second opening time longer than the first opening time (a time (for example, 3.0 seconds) that makes it easy for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). Open. In the following, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time of the electric chew 12D may be the same between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the win is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, for the special design losing pattern, it is also called "loss special pattern" to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a special figure-related random number when the starting condition is established, and performs the series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of the special figure, jackpot game, game state setting). Various decisions are made on random numbers. As shown in FIG. 10B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for judging the jackpot symbol type. A reach random number is a random number for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. The random number is also called judgment information. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-2-1. Big Hit Judgment Big hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not a big hit (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) according to a big hit determination table as shown in FIG. 12(A). The jackpot determination table is associated with the game state, more specifically, whether it is a normal probability state or a high probability state. That is, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table).

In each jackpot determination table, a judgment value (special symbol random number value) of the special symbol random number is distributed to the jackpot and loss, which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 judges whether it is a big win or a loss by judging the acquired special symbol random number according to the big win judgment table. As shown in FIG. 12(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the winning probability of the jackpot.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination The jackpot pattern type determination is used to determine the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) according to a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. Judgment. Each type of the jackpot symbol is associated with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot composed of the game privilege given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table includes the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the prize that causes the jackpot symbol type determination (the prize that caused the jackpot symbol type determination). is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12) where the is performed. That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot patterns, and in each jackpot pattern type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is distributed to the jackpot pattern type that is the result of the jackpot pattern type determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of the jackpot symbol by determining the acquired jackpot symbol type random number according to the jackpot symbol type determination table. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random numbers are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(B), the allocation rate of the jackpot pattern type by the jackpot pattern type determination for the special pattern 1 is set to 50% for the jackpot pattern A and 50% for the jackpot pattern B, and for the special pattern 2 It is possible for the jackpot pattern C to make the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type determined by the jackpot pattern type determination 100%. In this way, in the special figure 1 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the first start port 11 and the special figure 2 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 12, the swing of the jackpot symbol type Different fractions are possible.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment is for determining whether or not to generate a reach with a special figure fluctuation effect described later according to a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. Judgment.

The reach determination table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the reach determination table has a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and a reach determination table (time-saving reach determination table) used in the time-saving state. It should be noted that the ready-to-reach determination table does not have to be divided for each game state.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is distributed to the reach determination results "with reach (generate reach)" and "no reach (not generate reach)". . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether there is a reach or not (whether or not to generate a reach) by determining the acquired random number according to the reach determination table. As shown in FIG. 12(C), the number of reach random numbers determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" differs between the non-time saving reach determination table and the time saving reach determination table. In addition, it is possible to change the probability of being determined to have reach as appropriate. Below, "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "loss" is called "loss with reach", and "no reach (not generate reach)". This is sometimes called "no reach".

3-2-4. Special figure variation pattern determination Special figure variation pattern determination uses a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table) as shown in FIGS. It is a determination for determining the figure fluctuation pattern), and is performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a loss. The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination in addition to the special figure variation time and the effect flow of the special figure variation effect (contents of effect). Identification information to be included in the special figure variation pattern can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, as a special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns with different identification information, respectively, and the number can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning that causes the special figure variation pattern determination was performed (first start port 11/second start port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 14) used when performing. In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided according to the type of special symbol (special figure 1/special figure 2).

Each special figure variation pattern determination table is also associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state, and the special figure used in the time saving state There is a 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided for each game state.

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) is also associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a reach loss, and a reach no loss. In addition, it is not necessary to divide the special figure variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot determination result or the reach determination result.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss is also associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reach no loss is also associated with the number of special figures pending. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for . In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided according to the number of special figure reservations.

Then, variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81. Then, in the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special figure lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is executed subsequently. be.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. In addition, it is not necessary to associate the production flow of the special figure fluctuation effect with the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Also, as shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure variation pattern can be called by a name associated with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production contents of the special figure variation production. be. For example, the special figure variation pattern related to the big hit is called "big hit variation", and the special figure variation pattern related to the loss is called "losing variation". And, among the jackpot fluctuations, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach, which is a kind of reach, is performed is called "SP jackpot fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is called "L jackpot fluctuation". The special fluctuation pattern where the special fluctuation effect ends with N reach is called "N jackpot fluctuation", and the special fluctuation pattern in which the double eyes are aligned as soon as the reach is established is called "immediate jackpot fluctuation". To tell. On the other hand, in the loss with reach, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called "SP loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which L reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called "L loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with N reach, which is a kind of reach, is called "N loss variation", and the special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss It is called "Normal Loss Fluctuation". There are three types of normal losing fluctuations (normal A losing fluctuation, normal B losing fluctuation, normal C losing fluctuation) with different fluctuation times. In addition, the special figure variation pattern which is a special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss and has a shorter variation time than the "normal loss variation" is referred to as "shortened loss variation". There are two types of shortened losing fluctuations (shortening A losing fluctuation and shortening B losing fluctuation) with different fluctuation times. It should be noted that when the SP jackpot and the SP loss variation are collectively referred to as SP variation or SP reach variation.

3-2-5. Prefetching determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs prefetching determination according to a prefetching determination table as shown in FIG. 15 based on the obtained special figure-related random number. The look-ahead determination is performed before the jackpot determination (specifically, for example, when winning a start opening). For the look-ahead determination, for example, determination of whether or not the special symbol random number is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, determination of which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, special There is a determination of which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The look-ahead determination table is associated with the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting prize. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (first lookahead determination table) when winning the first starting gate 11 and a lookahead determination table (second lookahead determination table) when winning the second start gate 12. And there is. Since the first starting port 11 is a starting port that triggers the special figure 1 lottery, the first look-ahead determination table can also be called a special figure 1 look-ahead determination table. In addition, since the second starting port 12 is a starting port that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, the second look-ahead determination table can also be referred to as a special figure 2 look-ahead determination table. It should be noted that the look-ahead determination table does not have to be divided according to the type of starter opening (first starter opening 11/second starter opening 12).

In addition, the look-ahead determination table is also associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (non-time-saving lookahead determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and a look-ahead determination table (time-saving lookahead determination table) used in the time-saving state. .

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the time-saving state, and the second look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state. and a second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. Note that the look-ahead determination table does not have to be divided for each game state. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be described. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games with opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and the time between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the first round game. It includes an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending. Moreover, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. In addition, below, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) in each round game, It includes the type and opening time of each opening, the time to close until the next opening (closing time or interval time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). there is The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16 after the stop display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 16, the jackpot game control table stores a jackpot game component for each jackpot game (for example, each jackpot game A to C). In each jackpot game, from 1R to 15R, a round game in which the first big prize winning port 14 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the first big prize winning port 14 opens for a maximum of 0.1 second. , is performed. Then, in 16R (final round), there is a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. done. Further, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the large winning opening sensors 14a and 15a, the maximum opening time of the large winning openings 14 and 15 has not elapsed. end the round game.

Incidentally, the jackpot game A shown in FIG. 16 is executed when the type of the jackpot pattern that has been won is the jackpot pattern A (see FIG. 12(B)), and the jackpot game B is executed when the type of the jackpot pattern that has been won is the jackpot pattern. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the jackpot game C is executed when the type of the jackpot symbol that is won is the jackpot symbol C.

In addition, the number of times and time in each jackpot game component can be changed as appropriate. Moreover, it is possible to perform the jackpot game using both the first big winning port 14 and the second big winning port 15 or using only one of them. In the case of a configuration in which only a big winning game using only the first big winning opening 14 is performed, or a configuration in which only a big winning game using only the second big winning opening 15 is performed, a configuration that does not include the big winning opening that is not used. may be Also, the number of types of executable jackpot games may be plural or may be one.

Here, the specific area 16 will be described in detail. Since the specific area 16 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 16k, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. FIG. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k is also referred to as "opening/closing mode of the specific region 16". Further, the open state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V open”, and the closed state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V closed”.

The distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operation mode (that is, the specific area 16 is controlled in a constant opening/closing mode). For example, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)) for 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening 15 is started. Therefore, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15 and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state Due to the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15, the time and Due to the timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). In this way, in combination with a certain operation mode of the distribution member 16k (a certain opening and closing mode of the specific area 16) and the opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 15 in the big win game, the game ball is placed in the specific area in the big win game. It is possible to set the difficulty (easiness) of entering 16. In addition, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate. When another operation mode is shown in the explanation of "Characteristics of the pachinko game machine PY1" to be described later, it is assumed that the pachinko game machine PY1 adopts that operation mode.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are opened in the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). The operating jackpot is called "V long jackpot", and the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. The big win is called "V-short big win".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine PY1 has a "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state", "high probability high base game state" and " It is possible to make it into any game state of "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base game state" is "low probability low base state", "low probability high base game state" is "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base game state" is "high probability". "Low base state" and "high probability high base gaming state" may be abbreviated as "high probability high base state", respectively. As states constituting the game state, there are a state related to the probability of being determined as a "big win" in the big win determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low-probability low-base game state" or "low-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is a normal probability. The high-probability state is set in the "high-probability low-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal-probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, it is possible to switch to a high probability state by passing a game ball through the specific area 16 in a jackpot game. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. It is assumed that whether the trigger for switching to the high-probability state is the V passage or the type of the jackpot symbol is determined in advance according to the game characteristics to be realized. In the high-probability state, it is possible to switch from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state by performing a predetermined number of jackpot determinations without winning the jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in the "low probability low base game state", "high probability low base game state" or "jackpot game state". The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and compared to the non-time-saving state, the game state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time (eg, 3.0 seconds) is longer than the opening time (eg, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination is performed according to the special figure variation pattern determination table that is determined so that the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state. (See FIGS. 13-14). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is determined (FIG. 11(B)). Therefore, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time is greater in the time saving state.

In addition, the time saving state is more likely to be determined as a hit in the hit determination than the non-working time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability (eg, 59936/65536) higher than the probability (eg, 6600/65536) determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state (FIG. 11(A)). Therefore, the time-saving state has a larger number of hit determinations per unit time.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and the game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot election without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time-saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. In the time-saving state, it is possible to change from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state by performing a predetermined number of big win determinations without winning the big win, or by winning the next big win.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win a win than in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to be long. In other words, three points of the game related to the general pattern are set to be advantageous to the player. However, the points that are set in favor of this player may be some of them. Moreover, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving state may not be one in which the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is more likely to be selected than the one in the non-time saving state.

In addition, the game state after the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low-probability low-base game state" in which the normal probability state and the non-time-saving state are set. This game state is also called "normal game state". It should be noted that, in the "jackpot game state", the normal drawing lottery (hit judgment on the normal drawing) is performed, but the special drawing lottery (jackpot judgment) is not performed, so a non-time-saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. be. As for the game state, it is possible to use all or part of the game states described above. Also, various game states described in this specification can be arbitrarily expressed in the form of "n-th game state" (where n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). In addition, the low-probability low-base gaming state (low-probability low-base state) is a low-probability short-time state, the low-probability high-base gaming state (low-probability high-base state) is a low-probability short-time state, and the high-probability low-base gaming state (high probability Low base state) can be called a high probability non-time saving state, and a high probability high base gaming state (high probability high base state) can be called a high probability time saving state.

4. Main effects by game machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special variable production is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure fluctuation production and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 18A-1, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effects of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume setting of sound output from speaker 52, brightness setting of display section 50a, frequency setting of effects to be executed, and the like.

Normal production mode can be set when special figure fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base game state" or "high probability low base game state", and it is a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state be. In the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B-1, a first normal effect mode in which a background image (daytime normal background image G102) representing a daytime mountain view is displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image (ordinary evening background image G103) representing the evening mountain scenery is displayed on the display unit 50a; As shown in -3), there is a third normal effect mode in which a background image (normal nighttime background image G104) representing a mountain view at night is displayed on the display unit 50a. It can be switched as one condition that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed once or more times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal front-stage performance mode before reach is established and a normal rear-stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the normal front stage effect mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display unit 50a. A custom background image will be displayed. Also, a special performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18(B-4), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation performance mode includes a probability variation front stage performance mode before the reach is established and a probability variation rear stage performance mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the variable probability front stage effect mode, the probability variable background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the variable probability latter stage effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when a special figure variation performance is being performed in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is a performance mode indicating a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B-5, a background image representing the sky (background image for time saving G106) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the time reduction performance mode includes a time reduction front stage performance mode before reach is established and a time reduction rear stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the time saving front stage production mode, the background image G106 for time saving is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the time saving rear stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A jackpot opening production is performed in which a winning image G108 is displayed. During the round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C-2), the display unit 50a displays a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out. A round production will be performed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C-3), the ending image G111 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls are indicated on the display unit 50a. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize number image G112 is displayed.

It should be noted that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production (also simply referred to as "variation production") will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed. In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. Then, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production pattern.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production, in addition to the fluctuation display of the production pattern, various functions such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, and the special button 41 It is possible to perform other productions using a production device. In this case, other effects can be continued even after the stop display of the effect symbols.

4-2-1. Effect Symbol Display Area In the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect. Similarly, the middle production design area 50b2 and the right production design area 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle production design EZ2 and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section of the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small pattern area 50c is an area for variably displaying the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbols are variably displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 19(A), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the medium effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left effect pattern region 50b1. , middle effect symbol region 50b2, right effect symbol region 50b3, and small symbol region 50c, but are not actually displayed. Also, the range of each area can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-2. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special figure is started, for example, as shown in FIG. Left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, variable display of special symbols is not performed, and from the state of waiting for variable display of special symbols, Fig. 19 (B) , along with the start, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is, for example, "normal loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are different After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss, as shown in FIG. 19(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach such as "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode, and ready-to-win is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established in the normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the big win determination may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. decelerates to Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

In addition, with respect to the stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 suggesting a loss, the loose stitches when the reach is not established are referred to as "non-reach loose stitches" and "non-reach loose stitches", and the scattered stitches when the reach is established. They are called "reach loose eyes" or "reach loose eyes". How to combine the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the non-reach loose stitches (for example, "2, 3, 1" and "5, 8, 6", etc.), and The performance control microcomputer 121 selects how the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are combined (for example, "2.1.2" or "5.4.5"). Also, how to combine the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that constitute the stop mode (double eyes) suggesting a big win (for example, "2.2.2" or "7.7.7"). is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol.

4-2-4. SP reach The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 indicating that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(B), an SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final stage of the SP reach-only production is reached, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 21 (C-1), the display unit At 50a, an effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character (one of the ally characters) wins the battle and stands tall) is performed, and the effect patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in a stop mode suggesting a big win. (So-called double eyes) stop display. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called loose eyes) suggesting a loss. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change or add the contents of the effect of the SP reach.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each ready-to-win are stopped in a mode indicating a big win (big win expectation) will be described in detail. The degree of jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of jackpot determination. For example, the execution probability of N reach is set to 10% when the result of jackpot determination is "losing", and 100% when the result of jackpot determination is "jackpot", and the execution probability of SP reach is set to jackpot determination. 4% if the result of the judgment is "losing", and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". It is possible to In addition, SP reach A and SP reach B are made executable as SP reach, the execution probability of SP reach A is set to 2% when the result of big hit determination is ``losing'', and the result of big hit determination is ``big hit''. In the case of 30%, the execution probability of SP reach B is set to 2% when the result of the big hit determination is "losing", and 20% when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", It is possible to set the SP reach A jackpot expectation higher than the SP reach B jackpot expectation. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the judgment of the big win, it is possible to set the expected degree of the big win.

4-2-5. L reach Pachinko game machine PY1 can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the lottery result of the special lottery was a "jackpot" is lower than the SP reach but higher than the N reach, and is an effect for making the player expect a big win. function as The execution time of the ready-to-win effect of L reach is shorter than the effect time of the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win (FIGS. 13 and 14). Therefore, in the reach effect of the L reach, for example, a shorter moving image than the reach effect of the SP reach is displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, the content of the ready-to-win effect of the L-to-win can be changed as appropriate. In addition, a special figure variation pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-reach production of SP reach is executed expansively after the ready-to-reach production of L reach.

4-3. Suspended Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a suspended icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 22(A). The pending icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, depending on the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending, each A pending icon HA can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 reserved number is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the special figure 1 reserved number is "2", the first display area 50d1 and the second 2 display area 50d2 and the pending icon HA is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22A, it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of one display area in the vicinity of the pending icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the same icon TA as the pending icon HA (also referred to as the pending icon TA) in response to the start of the special figure variation effect. An icon different from the pending icon HA may be displayed as the icon TA.

It should be noted that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or a display area that displays only one of them. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the pending icon display area 50d is provided but not the icon display area 50e, or a configuration in which both are not provided.

4-3-1. Suspension effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a suspension effect in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. - 特許庁The pending effect can notify the player of the number of special figure 1 suspension or special figure 2 suspension.

In the pending effect, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 when the special figure 1 pending number is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls win the first starting hole 11 during the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. A pending icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is completed and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. The player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Notice Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a notice effect at an arbitrary timing during the special figure variation effect. The notice effect is a effect using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the input device (normal button 40, special button 41), etc. It is possible to suggest the result and the result of special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

4-4-1. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as an advance notice effect. The movable body performance is a performance for operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the movable body production, for example, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a and develops into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in the space of the display unit 50a that does not overlap the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k. After that, as shown in FIG. 23B, the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. This movable body production is an example of a development production. Note that the movable body presentation is not limited to suggestions for developing SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation. Also, the movable device to be operated in the movable body presentation can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the effect does not develop (for example, in the case of N-loss variation), it is possible to perform a movable body effect as a so-called fake effect. The movable body production is also called a movable body driving production.

4-4-2. Operation Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41 as an advance notice effect. The operation performance is a performance for causing the player to operate the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the operation effect, for example, in SP reach, a period (operation valid period) during which the pressing operation of the input device (special button 41) is valid occurs, and with the occurrence of this operation valid period, shown in FIG. 24 (A) As shown, an effect (operation promotion effect) for prompting the operation of the special button 41 is performed. In the operation promotion effect, an operation promotion image G30 is displayed on the display section 50a. The operation prompting image G30 includes an image simulating the special button 41 (special button image G31), an image (operation method instruction image G32) representing the operation method (that is, pressing operation) of the special button 41, and the remainder of the operation valid period. and an image representing time (effective period image G33). Note that the effective period image G33 is composed of a generally curvilinear progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation effective period. After that, in response to pressing of the special button 41 during the operation effective period, or after the operation effective period elapses without the special button 41 being operated during the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the on-board movable device 55 is activated, and the on-board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display portion 50a, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the operation effect is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation unit) such as the special button 41 and the normal button 40 is also called an operation instruction effect.

4-4-3. Prefetching Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a prefetching effect for the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve in which the special figure lottery is not performed as the notice effect. The look-ahead performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 suspension is "jackpot", as shown in FIG. may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "missing", the pending icon HA may be displayed as "*" as a so-called fake effect. In this way, the reserved icon HA and the icon TA are displayed in a special mode (for example, "*" in this mode, also called a special mode) instead of in a normal mode ("○" in this mode, also called a normal mode). The look-ahead effect is called a pending change effect. Also, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are collectively referred to as pending display. In this embodiment, as the pending display, the pending icon HA and the icon TA are displayed, but the configuration may be such that only the pending icon HA is displayed and the icon TA is not displayed. In addition, the timing of performing the suspension display of the special mode in the suspension change effect may be the time of the start winning that triggers the suspension display, or the shift display of the suspension display (the display area of the suspension icon HA It may be changed), or it may be during execution of the special figure variation (so-called the variation) corresponding to the pending display (when displayed as the icon TA). In addition, there may be a plurality of types of special modes of pending display.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to changing the display mode of the pending icon HA, and can be changed or added as appropriate. As the look-ahead effect other than the pending change effect, for example, there is a so-called continuous notice.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[1. Main control main processing]
The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 25 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 191 is input. When the RAM clear is executed, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure reservations and the result of judging whether a big hit is successful or not) is erased. Thereby, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability low base state, low probability non-time saving state). However, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, The information on the difference number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B are updated by adding 1 to them. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various types of normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005), input processing (S102) is first executed. In the input process (S102), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in, for example, a detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 10A and 10B, the processing for updating the counter values of various random numbers is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and during the other period (main timer interrupt process (S005)). S005) is completed and the period until the next main side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S107). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

After the special action process (S107), a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed. It should be noted that the sorting device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big winning device 15D is performed. However, the sorting device 16D may always be operated in a constant operation from power-on.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes output processing (S112). In the output process (S112), the commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described above are output to the sub control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

After that, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S113) and terminates the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S113), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. In addition, as other processing (S113), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time (see FIG. 25), and an interrupt pulse is input. (After about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, the second big winning opening sensor process, the specific area Sensor processing and outlet sensor processing are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning opening sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor 12a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first starting opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. Moreover, the 1st look-ahead determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 relation random number and the 1st look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first starting port sensor including a first starting win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the outlet sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet sensor.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol standby process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol determination process, and auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process, hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 106 . In addition, based on the current gaming state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, to generate a normal pattern fluctuation start command including information on the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern display device 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the normal pattern. In the normal pattern variation process, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result when the normal pattern variation time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal pattern being executed. Then, it generates a general pattern fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol determination process is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal design determination process, after a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the normal pattern being executed, the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. Determine whether or not there is If the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

Auxiliary game control processing is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Moreover, according to the result of the said process, the command for auxiliary game control is produced|generated.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special action process (S107), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol determination process, a big hit game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is not a jackpot game state, but a process performed during standby when variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the special symbol standby process, based on the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, along with performing the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 reservation storage unit Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is performed. .

In the special figure 2 determination process, using the special symbol random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state , Big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed to determine the type of the jackpot pattern using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special pattern 2 related random numbers and the special pattern 2 jackpot pattern type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated. It should be noted that a plurality of types of losing may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing pattern may be determined. In this case, the symbol specifying command may include information indicating the type of the missing symbol.

Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing is the processing which is done after special figure 2 decision processing. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and the special figure 2 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern determination table, determine the special figure 2 variation pattern. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process when the result of the big hit determination is loss, reach determination is made, and the special figure 2 variation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. In addition, the determination of the special figure 2 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (special figure 2 reservation number) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. And to generate a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 2, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the jackpot pattern type determination, information about the result of the reach determination, and the special figure 2 variation pattern. Includes information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the special figure 2 indicator 81b is caused to start variable display of the special figure 2.

Special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 2 determination processing and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 2 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 2 reservation storage unit 105b. In this way, the Toku-zu 2 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were acquired. And to generate a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the special figure 2 reservation number after the processing.

In the special figure 1 determination process, using the special symbol random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state , Big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed to determine the type of the jackpot pattern by using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special-figure 1 related random numbers and the special-figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination table. . Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated. It should be noted that a plurality of types of losing may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the type of the losing pattern may be determined. In this case, it is preferable to include information indicating the type of the lost symbol in the symbol designation command.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern determination table, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, reach determination is made, and the special figure 1 variation pattern is determined according to the result of the reach determination. In addition, the determination of the special figure 1 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information about special figure 1, information about the result of jackpot determination, information about the result of jackpot pattern type determination, information about the result of reach determination, and the special figure 1 variation pattern. Includes information such as special figure fluctuation time. Then, based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 indicator 81a is made to start the variable display of the special figure 1.

Special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 relationship random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 1 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 1 reservation storage unit 105a. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were acquired. Then, to generate a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing.

It should be noted that if there are both the special figure 2 pending number and the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority, and the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 are in parallel This is no longer done. That is, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform the special figure 1 determination process even if there is a special figure 1 suspension when there is a special figure 2 suspension. In addition, the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 may be configured to be performed in order of winning, or may be configured to be performed at the same time.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of special symbols. In the special symbol variation processing, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol indicator 81 is caused to end the variable display of the special symbol and stop displaying the special symbol according to the result of the big hit determination. If the result of the big win determination is a big win, the big win pattern indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the big win determination is a loss, the losing pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. And, to generate a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure.

[2-3-3. Special symbol confirmation process]
The special symbol determination process is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol determination process, when the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is a big winning symbol, the game state is shifted to a big winning game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information about the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a lost symbol and the high probability state is terminated, the normal probability state is set. Then, it generates a high-probability end command indicating transition to the normal-probability state. In addition, when the special figure currently stopped and displayed is a lost pattern and the time saving state is terminated, the non-time saving state is set. And the time saving end command which shows transition to non-time saving state is produced|generated. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a losing pattern and the number of reserved special figures 2 and the number of reserved special figures 1 are "0", the pachinko machine PY1 is waiting for a customer indicating that it is in a standby state. Generate commands.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control process]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is played according to the jackpot game control table. After shifting to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the lapse of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of the round game is generated. Also, the ending is started in accordance with the end of the final round game. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information about the result of the jackpot symbol type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting process]
The game state setting process is a process performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the game state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the high probability state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, it generates a high-probability setting command indicating the setting of the high-probability state. In addition, when changing from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game state ends. When limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the time saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. And the time saving setting command which shows the setting of a time saving state is produced|generated.

The command generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Effect Control by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. FIG. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the control of the effect by the following effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

[1. Sub control main processing]
The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the sub-control board 120 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for determining various effects are updated. As an example of a method for updating the effect determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number update process ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to various effects performed by the image control board 140, the sub-control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects by sound), and controls the lamp. Through the circuit 151, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are made to emit light (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the movable devices 55, 56, 58 are operated (various movable body effects are produced by actions). run or). In this way, various effects (special figure fluctuation effect, suspension effect, operation effect, look-ahead effect, other advance notice effect, jackpot game effect, customer waiting effect, control of effect mode, etc.) are realized.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S112) of the main control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[2.1 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 1msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 28, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process, the operation of the player's operable operation units such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a is detected, and depending on the detection result, a command is set or production data is created. In the light emission data output process, the lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light at the timing suitable for the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the input process, the effect data creation process, etc., which will be described later. Therefore, the light emission data is output to the lamp control circuit 151 . That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, based on the data for effects created in the input process, the later-described effect data creation process, etc., the movable bodies such as the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are operated at a predetermined timing to perform a movable body effect. drive data is output. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable object effect by operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58 and the like in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer.

[3.10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 29, received command analysis processing (S4201), effect timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), and effect data creation processing (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the received interrupt process (S4010) analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124, and performs processing according to the command (for example, selection of production, setting of production mode, command setting, etc.). I do. In effect timer update processing, the timer for measuring the time for each effect is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the operation unit such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data for controlling audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing results of the input process and the received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, the effect data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

Here, an example of processing when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the production control microcomputer 121 is a special figure variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process (S4201), when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start command is received, as the fluctuation start command reception processing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command A performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) of special figure variation performance is selected, information of the sub-variation pattern is set, and a variation performance start command including information of the sub-variation pattern is set in an output buffer. For example, if the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command is SP variation (SP jackpot variation or SP loss variation), select a sub variation pattern to perform SP reach, start variation production corresponding to the sub variation pattern Put the command in the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), emission data output process (S4102), movable device control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed, corresponding to the selected sub-variation pattern A special figure variation production is realized. The flow of processing related to the realization of such an effect is basically the same for other effects such as a jackpot game effect, a customer waiting effect, a look-ahead effect, and a so-called advance notice effect associated with the change.

7. Characteristic Portion of Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1 Characteristic portions of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described in detail below. One of the features of the pachinko game machine PY1 is the look-ahead effect.

First, the configuration of the game board unit YU in the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the game board unit YU has a navel lamp 46 capable of emitting light in various colors (an example of a "first light emitting section" or a "specific light emitting section") behind the first starting prize winning device 11D. It has The light emitted from the navel lamp 46 is emitted forward through a transparent synthetic resin member constituting the first start-up winning device 11D. Therefore, when the navel lamp 46 emits light, the position where the first starting prize winning device 11D is arranged appears to shine from the player's point of view.

The pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a chance lamp 48 (an example of a "second light emitting part") near the center in the vertical direction of the left game area 6A and on the rear side of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. The chance lamp 48 is decorated with letters of chance on the front side and has a plurality of LEDs arranged along the periphery. Since the game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin member, the chance lamps 48 are visible to the player.

The heso lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 are connected to the sub-control board 120 as shown in FIG. That is, lighting control of the navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 is performed via the lamp control circuit 151 by the performance control microcomputer 121 . The navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 are included in various lamps SL together with the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 .

Next, the jackpot game executable by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 can execute various jackpot games (jackpot games 1 to 4) shown in the jackpot game control table of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern" in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 1 determination process (special figure determination process based on the winning to the first start port 11). Any of the symbols 2” can be determined. More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 1" at a rate of 60% and "jackpot pattern 2" at a rate of 40%. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the jackpot symbol type determination in the special figure 2 determination process (special figure determination process based on the winning to the second start port 12), either "jackpot symbol 3" or "jackpot symbol 4" It is possible to determine whether More specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines "jackpot pattern 3" at a rate of 60% and "jackpot pattern 4" at a rate of 40%.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot symbol type. Specifically, in the "jackpot game 1" that is executed when the "jackpot pattern 1" is determined, and the "jackpot game 2" that is executed when the "jackpot pattern 2" is determined, the round game is performed 10 times. Then, from 1R to 4R, the first big winning port 14 is opened over a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game, and from 5R to 10R, the first opening is opened over a maximum of 0.1 seconds per round game. The big prize opening 14 is opened. From the 5th round to the 10th round of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first big winning hole 14 is extremely short, and in reality, the winning to the first big winning hole 14 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 10 times, the substantial number of round games is 4 times.

In addition, in the "jackpot game 3" executed when the "jackpot pattern 3" is determined and the "jackpot game 4" executed when the "jackpot pattern 4" is determined, the round game is played 10 times. done. Then, in all of 1R to 10R, the first big winning port 14 is opened for 29.5 seconds at maximum per one round game. In other words, in this jackpot game, the total number of round games and the substantial number of round games are 10 times.

Therefore, "jackpot game 3" and "jackpot game 4" with a substantial number of round games of 10 are "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" with a substantial number of round games of 4 times. The jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 3" or "jackpot game 4" is executed is the jackpot game in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 2" is executed. It can be said that this is a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state.

Next, game states that can be controlled by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The game control microcomputer 101, even when executing any of the jackpot games of "jackpot game 1", "jackpot game 2", "jackpot game 3" and "jackpot game 4", changes the game state after the jackpot game to Set to the time saving state (high base state). Further, when either "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 2" is set. When any jackpot game of game 4" is executed, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the normal probability state. That is, after "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3", control to a high probability high base game state (high probability state and short time state), and after "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4", Control to low probability high base game state (normal probability state and time saving state).

In this form, when winning a jackpot controlled to a high-probability high-base game state according to the end of the jackpot game (referred to as a probability variable jackpot), the final stop of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable performance. As a mode, doublets of odd numbered patterns (1 pattern, 3 patterns, 5 patterns, 7 patterns, or 9 patterns) may be displayed. On the other hand, when winning a jackpot controlled to a low-probability high-base game state according to the end of the jackpot game (referred to as a time-saving jackpot), as a final stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable performance. , even-numbered patterns (2 patterns, 4 patterns, 6 patterns, or 8 patterns) are displayed.

In this embodiment, the "high probability high base game state" can be continued until the next big winning game is executed. On the other hand, the "low probability high base game state" can be continued until the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches 100 times (predetermined upper limit number of times of execution).

Therefore, the "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" in which the high probability state is set after that is more advantageous to the player than the "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" in which the high probability state is not set after that. It can be said that it is a jackpot game. Also, the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 1" or "jackpot game 3" is executed is a game state more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state in which "jackpot game 2" or "jackpot game 4" is executed. I can say

It should be noted that the jackpot game state can be said to be a game state more advantageous than the normal game state regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. Also, the "high-probability high-base game state", which is one of the high-probability states, can be said to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the "low-probability high-base game state", which is one of the normal-probability states. In this specification, a game state that is advantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as an advantageous game state or an advantageous state.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 1 variation pattern using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 in the low probability non-time saving state.

The game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when set to the low probability non-time saving state, the result of the jackpot determination performed in the special figure 1 determination process, the reach determination result, and the special figure variation Based on the pattern random number, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the game control microcomputer 101 selects any one of "THP001", "THP002", or "THP003" as the special figure 1 variation pattern when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination. It is possible to determine whether Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. Distribution ratios are as shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the allocation rate (selection rate) of the special figure variation pattern within a range that does not interfere with the game. This is the same for special figure variation patterns other than "THP001" to "THP003".

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, and when the result of the reach determination is "with reach", as the special figure 1 variation pattern, "THP021", "THP022" , or “THP023”.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and when the result of the reach determination is "no reach", as the special figure 1 variation pattern, "THP031", "THP032" , or "THP033". Which of these three types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined has a different distribution rate depending on the number of special figure 1 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 1 pending number is 0 to 2, it is easy to determine the special figure variation pattern with a relatively long special figure variation time, and when the special figure 1 pending number is 3 to 4 , Toku-zu fluctuation time is relatively short Toku-zu fluctuation pattern is easy to determine.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP001" is a variation (battle jackpot variation) in which victory production (success production) is performed by developing from N reach to battle reach (a kind of SP reach). Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP021" is a variation (battle loss variation) in which a defeat effect (failure effect) is performed by developing from N reach to battle reach.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP002" is a variation (story jackpot variation) in which success production is performed by developing from N reach to story reach (a kind of SP reach). In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP022" is a variation (story loss variation) in which failure production is performed by developing from N reach to story reach. In addition, in this form, the selection ratio of battle reach and story reach is the same when the jackpot is won, and the selection ratio of battle reach and story reach is the same when losing.

Also, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP003" is an N jackpot variation in which N reach is performed but SP reach (battle reach and story reach) is not performed. In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "THP023" is an N loss variation in which N reach is performed but SP reach (battle reach and story reach) is not performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "THP031" is a "normal A loss fluctuation" in which the fluctuation production ends in 13 seconds without the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach, and "THP032" is the production pattern EZ1. , EZ2 and EZ3 are "normal B loss fluctuation" in which the variable performance ends in 8 seconds without becoming a reach, and "THP033" is a variable performance in which the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 do not become a reach and the variable performance is 4 seconds. It is a "normal C loss variation" that ends with. In addition, the reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of performance symbols that is variably displayed remains. It is a state (for example, "7↓7" state) that is a combination of performance symbols indicating that the game state will be advantageous to the player (for example, that the game state will be a jackpot game state).

In this form, SP reach such as battle reach and story reach is executed after N reach, and N reach is executed when normal variation is executed and production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 become reach state (reach state). (Refer to the column of the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production in FIG. 33).

Here, the battle ready-to-win (an example of the first specific effect) is a ready-to-reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle. The battle ready-to-win has win-lose branches, and branches into a victory presentation (success presentation) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, or a defeat presentation (failure presentation) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. The win effect (success effect) functions as a effect suggesting to the player that he or she has won a jackpot. The defeat effect (failure effect) functions as an effect suggesting to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, in Battle Ready, first, an image or the like indicating that a friendly character and an enemy character will battle each other is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 34(A)). Then, an image showing how the ally character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display section 50a (not shown). Before the win-lose branch, an image showing that the ally character is attacking the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 34(B)). In the win-lose branch, if the battle reach is executed based on the battle jackpot variation (see FIG. 33), the ally character wins over the enemy character as a success effect (winning effect) suggesting that the jackpot has been won. A winning image (including an image of happy teammates and a background image for success G80) indicating that the win is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 suggest winning the jackpot. Then, the display is stopped with "double eyes" (FIG. 34(C)). On the other hand, in the case of a battle reach executed based on a change in battle loss, a defeat image ( (including an image of a sad teammate character and a failure background image G81) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stop-displayed as "ready-to-lose" indicating failure. (Fig. 34(D)).

Also, story reach (an example of the second specific effect) is a reach effect showing a story about a work that is the motif of the pachinko game machine PY1. The story reach has a win-lose branch, and branches into a success effect in which the story ends with a good ending, or a failure effect in which the story ends with a bad end. The success effect in the story ready-to-win functions as a effect to suggest to the player that he or she has won a jackpot, similarly to the success effect in the battle ready-to-win. The failure effect in the story ready-to-win functions as an effect to suggest to the player that the jackpot has not been won, similarly to the failure effect in the battle ready-to-win.

As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 35, in Story Reach, first, an image showing a friend character and a heroine appearing in the story is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 35(A)). The effect shown in FIG. 35(A) functions as an effect suggesting the start of story reach. Then, an image along the story is displayed on the display section 50a (FIG. 35(B)). The story reach of this form is a story in which an ally character searches for a heroine. In the win-lose branch, if the story reach is executed based on the story jackpot variation (see FIG. 33), the heroine is happy as a success effect (winning effect) that suggests that the jackpot has been won. A success image (including an image in which the heroine is happy and a background image G80 for success) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 suggest a big win. ” is stopped and displayed (FIG. 35(C)). On the other hand, if it is a story reach that is executed based on the change in the story loss, a failure image showing that the heroine is sad (an image of the heroine being sad and background image for failure G81) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are stop-displayed as "reach-losing eyes" suggesting a loss (FIG. 35 (D )).

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the effect image on the display unit 50a in each effect (normal variation, N reach, SP reach, etc.) constituting the special figure fluctuation effect and the look-ahead effect etc., and also displays the effect image. Depending on this, various lamps SL (including navel lamp 46, chance lamp 48), light emitting effects using speaker 52, sound effects using speaker 52, movable body effects using movable devices 55, 56, 58, input device ( It is possible to execute an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41).

Next, the look-ahead determination of the special figure 1 in the low probability non-time saving state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) will be described. The microcomputer 101 for game control specifies the start winning a prize command according to the special figure 1 using the special figure 1 prefetch determination table shown in FIG.

The game control microcomputer 101, in the first look-ahead determination (pre-reading determination of the special figure 1) when set to the low probability non-time-saving state, the special symbol random number acquired by the start winning prize is determined to be a big hit by the big hit determination. Whether or not, and to determine which special figure variation pattern the special figure variation pattern random number is determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and based on the results of these determinations, specify the start winning command. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 101 selects "SC001" as the start winning command when determining that the "battle jackpot change" is scheduled, and determines that the "story jackpot change" is scheduled. Sometimes, "SC002" is selected as the start winning command, and "SC003" is selected as the starting winning command when it is determined that "N jackpot variation" is planned. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 selects "SC011" as the start winning command when it determines that the "battle loss variation" is scheduled, and selects "SC012" as the start winning command when it determines that the "story loss variation" is scheduled. When it is determined that 'N-loss variation' is scheduled, 'SC013' is selected as the starting winning command, and when 'normal failure variation' is determined to be scheduled, 'SC014' is selected as the starting winning command.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment sets the display mode of the pending display (the pending icon HA, the icon TA) to a special display mode different from the normal display mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the above-described prefetch determination. It is possible to execute the pending change effect displayed by . In this embodiment, the pending display is a circular icon, and the pending change effect is a effect of changing the display color of the pending display. The pachinko game machine PY1 can display a white pending display as the pending display in the normal display mode, and can display a blue pending display and a red pending display as the pending display in the special display mode. In addition, the display of the pending icon HA and the icon TA is performed when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command), and when the variation start command (special figure 1 variation Start command and special figure 2 fluctuation start command) is received. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts displaying the pending icon HA at the start winning, shifts the pending icon HA at the start of fluctuation, or terminates the display of the icon TA. A known technique can be appropriately employed for display control of the pending icon HA and the icon TA.

FIG. 37 is a lottery table for holding change effects. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the starting prize winning command from the game controlling microcomputer 101, it performs a holding change performance execution lottery based on the analysis result of the starting prize winning command. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121, as shown in FIG. 37, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit variation (that is, the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "SC001", "SC002" , “SC003”), 40% of the time, it is decided to execute a pending change effect in which the final display mode of the pending display is red, and 35% of the time, the final display of the pending display. It is decided to execute the suspension change performance with the mode set to blue, and it is decided not to perform the suspension change performance at a rate of 25%. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with reach (that is, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is either "SC011", "SC012", or "SC013" ), at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute a pending change effect in which the final display mode of the pending display is red, and at a rate of 30%, a pending change effect is executed in which the final display mode of the pending display is blue. 60% of the time, it decides not to perform the pending change effect. It should be noted that in this form, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation without reach (that is, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "SC014"), the pending change effect is executed. I have decided not to. Even if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation without reach, the suspension change effect may be executed.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit, the pending change effect is more likely to be executed than when the result is a loss. Therefore, the pending change effect functions as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. In addition, in this form, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit, the pending change effect (red pending effect) with the final display mode in red (red pending effect) is the final display mode in blue (blue pending effect) ), and if the result of the look-ahead determination is a failure, the pending change effect (red pending effect) with the final display mode as red (red pending effect) is more likely to be executed with the final display mode being blue (blue Hold effect) is harder to execute. Therefore, the red reservation effect functions as an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the blue reservation effect.

When it is decided to execute the holding change performance in the execution lottery of the holding change performance, a lottery for execution timing of the holding change performance (timing of the holding change) is carried out. The timing of the pending change includes three timings, that is, at the time of start winning, at the time of shift display, and during the change. The time of starting winning is when a starting winning that triggers the execution of the pending change effect occurs. The shift display time is when the display position of the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold as the execution trigger of the hold change effect is changed to another hold icon display area 50d (when the hold display is shift-displayed). The term "during variation" means that the variation performance is being executed based on the special figure suspension as a trigger for execution of the suspension change performance. It should be noted that in this specification, the special figure hold as the execution trigger of the look-ahead effect (including the hold change effect) is referred to as target hold.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the timing of change of hold is performed based on the table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38, the lottery for the timing of pending change is performed based on the final display mode of the pending display and the number of pending winnings that triggered execution of the pending change effect.

Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines to perform the red reservation effect as the reservation change effect, when the special figure reservation that triggers the execution of this red reservation effect occurs as the fourth special figure reservation, As the execution timing of the pending change performance, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 25%, the shift display time is selected at a rate of 50%, and the change is selected at a rate of 25%. In addition, when the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the red reservation effect occurs as the third special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 35% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the shift display time is selected. Select at a rate of 40% and select at a rate of 25% during the variation. In addition, when the special figure reservation that triggers the execution of the red reservation production occurs as the second special figure reservation, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 50% as the execution timing of the reservation change production, and the shift display time is selected. Select at a rate of 25% and select at a rate of 25% during the variation. In addition, when the special figure reservation that triggers the execution of the red reservation production occurs as the first special figure reservation, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 60% as the execution timing of the reservation change production, and the fluctuation is performed. Select at a rate of 40% and do not select shift display time.

On the other hand, when it is decided to perform a blue suspension effect as a suspension change effect, when a special figure suspension that triggers the execution of this blue suspension effect occurs as a fourth special figure suspension, the execution timing of the suspension change effect , the start winning time is selected at a rate of 10%, the shift display time is selected at a rate of 60%, and the fluctuation is selected at a rate of 30%. In addition, when the special figure reservation that triggers the execution of the blue reservation effect occurs as the third special figure reservation, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 20% as the execution timing of the reservation change effect, and the shift display time is selected. Select at a rate of 50% and select at a rate of 30% during the variation. In addition, when the special figure hold that triggers the execution of the blue hold effect occurs as the second special figure hold, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 30% as the execution timing of the hold change effect, and the shift display time is selected. Select at a rate of 40% and select at a rate of 30% during the variation. In addition, when the special figure suspension that triggers the execution of the blue suspension production occurs as the first special figure suspension, the start winning time is selected at a rate of 40% as the execution timing of the suspension change production, and the fluctuation is Select at a rate of 60% and do not select shift display time.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is easier to select the execution timing of "start winning" for the red pending effect than for the blue pending effect. As a result, the player is likely to expect that the red reservation effect will be executed at the time of starting winning, and the game interest is improved.

Next, the lottery for the navel lamp lighting effect will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment can execute a belly button light emission effect in which the navel lamp 46 emits light in the same color (that is, red or blue) as the hold display in the special display mode when executing the hold change effect. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs the belly button light emission effect in conjunction with the holding change effect. That is, when displaying the special display mode suspension display (red suspension display or blue suspension display), the navel lamp 46 may emit light in the same color as the suspension display in the special display mode.

FIG. 39 is a lottery table for navel lamp lighting effect. When the production control microcomputer 121 decides to execute the holding change production, it draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the belly button light emission production based on the table shown in FIG. If the result of the look-ahead determination related to the target suspension of the suspension change effect is a big hit change (start winning command "SC001", "SC002", or "SC003"), the belly button light emission effect is executed at a rate of 98%. At a rate of 2%, it is decided not to execute the navel lamp lighting effect. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination related to the target hold of the hold change effect is a loss variation with reach (start prize command "SC011", "SC012", or "SC013"), at a rate of 90%, It is decided to execute the navel lamp lighting effect, and at a rate of 10%, it is decided not to execute the navel lamp lighting effect.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit or a loss with reach, when executing the pending change effect, the belly button light emission effect is executed in conjunction with an extremely high probability. It has become. As a result, the execution of the pending change effect becomes more lively. It should be noted that the probability that the belly button light emitting effect is not interlocked when executing the pending change effect is higher at the time of losing than at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, when both the holding change effect and the belly button light emitting effect are executed, the expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than when the holding change effect is executed and the belly button light emitting effect is not executed. ing.

Next, the lottery for the chance lamp lighting effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. The pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment can execute a chance lamp lighting effect for causing the chance lamp 48 to emit light as a look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead determination. The light emission colors of the chance lamp 48 in the chance lamp lighting effect include yellow and purple. In addition, the light emission mode (more specifically, the mode related to the order of light emission) other than the light emission color includes simultaneous lighting and sequential lighting.

Simultaneous lighting, as shown in FIGS. 41(A) and 41(B), is a light emission mode in which all of the plurality of LEDs included in the chance lamp 48 are lighted at once. 41A, 41C, 41D, and 41E, the sequential lighting means that the plurality of LEDs included in the chance lamp 48 are sequentially turned clockwise from the lowest LED. This is a light emission mode in which light is emitted so that the number of LEDs that are present increases. After the state shown in FIG. 41(E) is established, the state shown in FIG. 41(A) is restored, and the light emission control is repeated in the order of FIG. 41(C)→FIG. 41(D)→FIG. 41(E). 41(A)→FIG. 41(C)→FIG. 41(D)→FIG. 41(E)→FIG. 41(A)→FIG. 41(C)→ . Each LED of the chance lamp 48 is repeatedly illuminated so as to flow around. Sequential lighting is also called sequential lighting. The sequential lighting corresponds to the first mode of the light emission modes of the chance lamps 48, and the simultaneous lighting corresponds to the second mode.

FIG. 40 is a lottery table for the chance lamp lighting effect. When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the start winning command from the game control microcomputer 101, it performs a lottery for execution of the chance lamp light emission performance based on the table shown in FIG. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121, if the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the starting winning command received from the game controlling microcomputer 101 is a big hit change (that is, the received starting winning command is "SC001", "SC002" , or if it is "SC003"), 28% of the time, it is decided to execute the chance lamp light emission effect with the "purple" light emission color and "sequential lighting", and 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the "yellow" light. It is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color of "purple" and "simultaneous lighting", At a rate of 17%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting performance with the ``yellow'' emission color and ``all lighting'', and at a rate of 10%, it is decided not to perform the chance lamp lighting performance. When the chance lamp lighting effect is not performed, each LED of the chance lamp 48 continues to be in the off state (off state).

On the other hand, if the result of the prefetch determination indicated by the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is a loss variation with reach (that is, the received starting winning command is "SC011", "SC012", or " SC013"), the production control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the chance lamp lighting production with the luminescent color of "purple" and "sequential lighting" at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 3%, It is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting performance with the ``yellow'' luminescent color and ``sequential lighting'', and at a rate of 7%, the chance lamp lighting performance with the ``purple'' luminescent color and ``simultaneous lighting'' is performed. 9% decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with “yellow” light emission color and “all lighting”, and 80% decided not to execute the chance lamp lighting effect. do. It should be noted that in this embodiment, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation without reach (that is, if the start winning command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is "SC014"), the chance lamp light emission effect I am not going to do it. Even if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation with no reach, the chance lamp lighting effect may be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit, the chance lamp lighting effect is more likely to be executed than when the result is a loss. Therefore, the chance lamp lighting effect functions as a effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is high. In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit, sequential lighting is more likely to be selected than all-at-once lighting, and when the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss, all-at-once lighting is preferred over sequential lighting. is likely to be selected. Therefore, the chance lamp lighting effect of sequentially lighting functions as a performance suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than the chance lamp lighting effect of simultaneous lighting. In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the pre-reading judgment is a big hit, the purple emission color is more likely to be selected than the yellow emission color in both the case of sequential lighting and the simultaneous lighting, and the result of the pre-reading judgment is a loss. In some cases, yellow emission color is more likely to be selected than purple emission color in both sequential lighting and simultaneous lighting. Therefore, the purple sequential lighting chance lamp lighting effect functions as a performance that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the yellow sequential lighting chance lamp lighting performance, and the purple simultaneous lighting chance lamp lighting performance It functions as a production that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the yellow chance lamp lighting production.

Here, the navel lamp lighting effect and the chance lamp lighting effect will be compared. First, the navel lamp lighting effect is executed with a very high probability when the holding change effect is executed (see FIG. 39). Therefore, the belly button light emission effect is a effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher if executed than if not executed, as with the pending change effect. In addition, in the belly button light emission effect, the belly lamp 46 emits light in the same color as the display color of the hold display in the hold change effect. It is a production that suggests high.

And in this form, the holding change effect and the navel lamp lighting effect (almost executed in conjunction with the execution of the holding change effect) have a probability of not being executed when the result of the look-ahead judgment is a big hit change compared to about 25%. It has a relatively high probability of being executed when the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation, which is about 40% (see FIG. 37). On the other hand, the chance lamp light effect has a relatively low probability of not being executed when the result of the look-ahead determination is a big win variation, and has a relatively low probability of being executed when the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss variation. % (see FIG. 40). That is, in the present embodiment, the chance lamp light emission effect is extremely easy to execute when winning the jackpot and extremely difficult to execute when the jackpot is not won, compared to the holding change effect and the navel lamp light effect. ing. Therefore, it can be said that the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the chance lamp light emission effect is executed than when the holding change effect and the belly button light emission effect are executed.

In addition, in this form, in the pending change effect, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a loss change, blue pending (blue pending display) is selected as the final display mode of the pending display at a rate of 30%, and red pending (red display on hold) is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit change, blue pending is selected at a rate of 35% and red pending is selected at a rate of 40% as the final display mode of the pending display (see FIG. 37). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the blue hold effect is executed with a certain high probability, and similarly, the belly button light emission effect, which is almost executed in conjunction with the hold change effect, emits blue light. The belly button lighting effect is executed with a certain high probability. On the other hand, for the chance lamp lighting effect, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss change, the rate of sequential lighting is 4% (more specifically, the rate of sequential lighting of purple is 1%, and the rate of sequential lighting of yellow is 3%). ), and simultaneous lighting is performed at a rate of 16% (more specifically, simultaneous purple lighting is performed at a rate of 7% and yellow simultaneous lighting is performed at a rate of 9%). On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit change, the sequential lighting is performed at a rate of 53% (more specifically, the purple sequential lighting is 28% and the yellow sequential lighting is 25%), and is lit all at once. is executed at a rate of 37% (more specifically, simultaneous lighting of purple is 20% and yellow is simultaneously lit at 17%) (see FIG. 40). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the chance lamp lighting effect is executed, sequential lighting is executed with a relatively high probability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the chance lamp light emission effect is more likely to suggest a high jackpot expectation than the case where the holding change effect and the navel lamp light emission effect are executed. Incidentally, if the chance lamp light-emitting effect can be made to be a effect that easily suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the navel lamp light-emitting effect, the execution probability of each effect and the distribution rate of the mode of the effect can be appropriately changed.

Next, an execution example of a characteristic effect in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. FIG. These effect execution examples are realized by the above configuration.

FIG. 42 shows an example of performance execution when the winning to the first start port 11, which is the trigger for executing the look-ahead effect, occurs as the fourth special figure 1 hold. The position of the special figure hold) is hold 4 (4th hold), hold 3 (3rd hold), hold 2 (2nd hold), hold 1 (1st hold), the change It shows the execution status of the production when changing (special figure fluctuation based on target hold).

Production execution examples 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 42 execute a red suspension production as a holding change production based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 suspension, and a navel lamp lighting production and a chance lamp lighting production. This is an example when it is decided not to execute. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in the production execution example 1, red pending is displayed as the pending display representing the fourth special figure 1 pending, Continue to display red pending (that is, red pending is displayed as the pending icon HA indicating the third, second, and first special figure 1 pending and the icon TA during the change).

In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the pending change, for example, as shown in the effect execution example 2, the holding display representing the fourth and third special figure 1 pending , the normal hold is displayed, and when the shift display is performed to the hold display representing the second special figure 1 hold, it is changed to red hold, and the red hold is displayed thereafter. In addition, when "at the time of shift display" is selected as the timing of hold change, at which timing of the shift display to hold 3, shift display to hold 2, or shift display to hold 1 is performed? shall be determined by lottery. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "during the relevant fluctuation" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in the production execution example 1, as a holding display representing the special figure 1 hold of the 4th to 1st Display normal hold and change to red hold during the change. In production examples 1 to 3, the production control microcomputer 121 extinguishes the navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 regardless of whether the position of the target reservation is from "suspension 4" to "relevant change".

Production execution examples 4 to 6 shown in FIG. 42 are based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 hold, execute the red hold production as a hold change production, and in conjunction with this, the belly button light emission production ( More specifically, it is an example of a case where it is determined that the navel lamp light emission effect of lighting the navel lamp 46 in red is executed, and the chance lamp light emission effect is not executed. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the hold change, as shown in the production execution example 4, red hold is displayed as a hold display representing the fourth special figure 1 hold, When the red reservation is displayed, the navel lamp light-emitting performance for lighting the navel lamp 46 in red is executed. After that, until the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation is completed, the display of red reservation and the navel lamp emission effect of red lighting are continued.

In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the pending change, for example, as shown in the effect execution example 5, the holding display representing the fourth and third special figure 1 pending , and the navel lamp 46 is turned off during this time. Then, when the shift display is made to the reservation display representing the second special figure 1 reservation, it is changed to red reservation and the navel lamp 46 is lit in red. After that, until the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation is completed, the display of red reservation and the belly button light emission effect of red lighting are continued. In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 121 selects "currently fluctuating" as the timing of the pending change, as shown in the effect execution example 6, as a pending display representing the fourth to first special figure 1 pending A normal hold is displayed, and the navel lamp 46 is extinguished during this time. During this change, the color is changed to red pending, and at the time of this change, the navel lamp 46 is lit in red. In addition, in production execution examples 4 to 6, the production control microcomputer 121 turns off the chance lamp 48 regardless of whether the position of the target reservation is from "suspension 4" to "relevant change".

Here, FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the display section 50a, the navel lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning in the effect execution example 4 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 (A) (B), in production execution example 4, according to the winning to the first start port 11, red pending icon as a pending display corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 pending HA is displayed and the navel lamp 46 is lit in red. The chance lamp 48 remains extinguished. Thus, in this embodiment, since the navel lamp 46 is turned on when the holding change performance is executed, it is possible to stimulate a sense of expectation for the winning of the jackpot and to expect an improvement in the amusement of the game, rather than simply performing the holding change performance.

In addition, production execution examples 7 to 8 shown in FIG. 42 execute the chance lamp lighting production without executing the holding change production and navel lamp lighting production based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 holding. This is an example of a case where it is decided to do so. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to perform the chance lamp light emission effect in the light emission mode of yellow light emission color and simultaneous lighting, as shown in the effect execution example 7, the timing when the fourth special figure 1 reservation occurs Then, the chance lamps 48 are lit in yellow and all at once. This chance lamp lighting effect continues until the special figure variation based on the target hold ends. In addition, in this effect execution example 7, the normal hold continues to be displayed as the hold display corresponding to the target hold, and the navel lamp 46 is extinguished regardless of the position of the target hold from "hold 4" to "corresponding change". keep doing

In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to perform the chance lamp light emission effect in the yellow light color and the sequential lighting light emission mode, as shown in the effect execution example 8, the fourth special figure 1 suspension occurs. At this timing, the chance lamp 48 is lit in a yellow and sequential lighting mode. This chance lamp lighting effect continues until the special figure variation based on the target hold ends. In addition, in this effect execution example 8, the normal hold continues to be displayed as the hold display corresponding to the target hold, and the navel lamp 46 is extinguished regardless of the position of the target hold from "hold 4" to "corresponding change". keep doing

Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the display section 50a, the navel lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning in the effect execution example 8 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 44 (A) (B), in production execution example 8, according to the winning to the first start port 11, as a hold display corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold, of the normal display mode While the pending icon HA is displayed, the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit yellow light in a sequential lighting mode. The navel lamp 46 remains extinguished. As described above, in the present embodiment, the chance lamp 48 may emit light even if the holding change effect or the belly button light emission effect is not executed. Increased interest in gaming is expected.

In addition, production execution examples 9 to 10 shown in FIG. 42 are based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 hold, the hold change production with the final display mode as red hold, navel lamp light emission production, and chance This is an example of the case where it is decided to execute the lamp lighting effect. When the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of start winning" as the timing of the hold change, as shown in the production execution example 9, red hold is displayed as a hold display representing the fourth special figure 1 hold, When the red reservation is displayed, the navel lamp light-emitting performance for lighting the navel lamp 46 in red is executed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes a chance lamp light effect that causes the chance lamps 48 to emit light in, for example, a purple light color and a simultaneous lighting mode at the same time as the navel lamp light effect. After that, until the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation ends, the display of red reservation, the belly button light emission effect of red lighting, and the chance lamp light emission effect of purple and simultaneous lighting are continued.

In addition, when the production control microcomputer 121 selects "at the time of shift display" as the timing of the hold change, as shown in production execution example 10, normal hold is displayed as the hold display representing the fourth special figure 1 hold. At the same time, when the normal suspension is displayed, a chance lamp light effect is executed in which the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit light, for example, in a purple color and in a sequential lighting mode. At this time, the navel lamp 46 is still off. And for example, while displaying the normal hold until the hold display representing the third special figure 1 hold, the navel lamp 46 is turned off, and when the shift display is made to the hold display representing the second special figure 1 hold, red Along with changing to the hold, the navel lamp light-emitting performance for lighting the navel lamp 46 in red is executed. After that, until the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation is completed, the display of red reservation and the belly button light emission effect of red lighting are continued. In addition, the purple and sequential lighting chance lamp light-emitting effect is continuously executed from the time of starting winning according to the fourth special figure 1 reservation until the special figure fluctuation based on the starting winning is completed.

Here, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the display section 50a, the navel lamp 46, and the chance lamp 48 at the time of starting winning in the effect execution example 9 shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, in production execution example 9, according to the winning to the first start port 11, red display color as a hold display corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold is displayed, the navel lamp 46 is illuminated in red, and the chance lamps 48 are illuminated in a purple emission color and in a simultaneous illumination mode. In this way, in the present embodiment, not only is the pending change effect and the belly button light emitting effect executed when the starting prize is won, but also the chance lamp 48 (a lamp different from the belly button lamp 46) may emit light. As compared with a configuration in which there is only one type of lamp that can emit light, the degree of expectation for a big win can be greatly stimulated, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing operations of the display unit 50a, navel lamp 46, and chance lamp 48 in the effect execution example 10 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46 (A) (B), in production execution example 10, according to the winning to the first start port 11, as a hold display corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold, of the normal display mode While the pending icon HA is displayed, the chance lamp 48 is caused to emit light in a purple emission color and in a sequential lighting mode. At this point, the navel lamp 46 is still turned off. And, as shown in FIG. 46 (B) (C), when the shift display to the hold display corresponding to the second special figure 1 hold, while changing the hold display corresponding to the target hold to the red hold, The navel lamp 46 is lit in red. In this way, in this embodiment, the chance lamp 48 is lit at the time of starting winning, but even if the pending change effect is not executed, at a timing other than the starting winning, such as when the shift is displayed or during the change, the pending change An effect may be executed, and in this case, the belly button light emission effect is also almost executed in conjunction with the pending change effect. Therefore, even if the belly button 46 does not emit light at the time of starting winning, the surprise that the belly button 46 emits light at a different timing and the relatively high expectation of the big win by the belly button light emitting effect and the holding change effect suggest a player's expectation for the big win. It is possible to further increase it, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

8. Effect of Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting portions (the navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 ) (see FIG. 42), the player can be interested in which light emitting unit emits light, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the chance lamp 48 emits light in response to the winning of the first starting port 11, it is suggested that the expectation of the big win is higher than when the navel lamp 46 emits light. (See FIGS. 37, 39, and 40), so when the chance lamp 48 lights up, the player's sense of anticipation can be greatly stimulated, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, while the navel lamp 46 can easily suggest the degree of expectation by the difference in the light emission color, the chance lamp 48 has a different method from the navel lamp 46 (light emission mode other than the light emission color). difference) suggests the degree of expectation (see FIGS. 40 and 41). Therefore, in both cases, the variety of effects can be increased compared to a configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested only by the luminescent color, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the navel lamp 46 that can emit light when winning the first start port 11 is used at times other than the start winning, such as during the shift display of the hold display and during the special figure fluctuation based on the target hold. Light may be emitted in response to a change in the display mode of the pending display at the timing (see example 5 of effect execution in FIG. 42). Therefore, it is possible to give surprise to the player, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the navel lamp 46 emits light at a timing other than the start-up winning time, the color corresponding to the display color of the pending display after the change is lit. The relevance of is easily transmitted to the player, the excitement of the production can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the navel lamp 46 may emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the hold display related to the hold change effect from the start winning (see production execution example 4 in FIG. 42). , the relevance between the belly button 46 and the hold display is enhanced, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light emitting units are used as the light emitting unit that can indicate the degree of expectation for a big win by a difference in light emission color and that can emit light according to the winning of the first start port 11. 37, 39, and 40), it is possible to make the player interested in which light-emitting portion emits light in what color. Increased interest can be expected.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the navel lamp 46 and the chance lamp 48 may emit light in different colors in accordance with the winning to the first start port 11 (effect execution example 9 in FIG. 42). See), it is expected that the variety of effects will improve and that the interest in games will increase.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the emission color of the navel lamp 46 capable of emitting light in response to the winning of the first start port 11 corresponds to the display color of the hold display related to the hold change effect. The relevance of the presentation between 46 and the pending display is enhanced. In addition, since the color of the light emitted from the chance lamp 48 does not correspond to the color of the reserved display, even if the color of the reserved display is a color with a low degree of expectation, depending on the color of the light emitted from the chance lamp 48, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. It can make you feel hopeful. As a result, an improvement in amusement is expected.

9. Modifications of the First Embodiment Modifications (including the second embodiment and the third embodiment) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described below. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the above embodiments and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

<Second embodiment>
In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the story reach is performed as the SP reach, the lottery for executing the chance lamp light emission effect is performed based on a different lottery table than when the battle reach is performed. It differs from the pachinko game machine PY1 of the embodiment. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the effect control microcomputer 121, if the result of the look-ahead determination is the battle jackpot fluctuation or the N jackpot fluctuation (that is, the received start winning prize If the command is "SC001" or "SC003"), at a rate of 28%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the emission color of "purple" and "sequential lighting", and at a rate of 25%, It is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting performance with the ``yellow'' luminescent color and ``sequential lighting'', and at a rate of 20%, the chance lamp lighting performance with the ``purple'' luminescent color and ``simultaneous lighting'' is performed. At a rate of 17%, it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the “yellow” light emission color and “all lighting”, and at a rate of 10%, the chance lamp lighting effect is not executed (chance lamp 48 remain extinguished). In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121, if the result of the look-ahead determination is battle loss variation or N loss variation (that is, if the received start winning command is "SC011" or "SC013"), at a rate of 1%, It is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color of ``purple'' and ``sequential lighting'', and at a rate of 3%, the chance lamp lighting effect is executed with the luminescent color of ``yellow'' and ``sequential lighting''. At a rate of 7%, it was decided to execute a chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color of “purple” and “all lighting”, and at a rate of 9%, it was decided to execute the “yellow” luminescent color and “all lighting”. , and at a rate of 80%, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp lighting effect (the chance lamp 48 is kept off). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when battle reach is performed, or when N reach is performed but does not develop into SP reach, the chance lamp lighting effect of sequential lighting is better than the chance lamp lighting all at once. The expectation of a big hit is higher than the lighting effect.

On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead determination is the story jackpot change (that is, if the received start winning command is "SC002"), the effect control microcomputer 121 will select "purple" at a rate of 20%. Decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color and "sequential lighting", decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color of "yellow" and "sequential lighting" at a rate of 17%, At a rate of 28%, it was decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the luminescent color of “purple” and “all lighting”, and at a rate of 25%, the chance lamps with the luminescent color of “yellow” and “all lighting” were decided. It is decided to execute the lighting effect, and at a rate of 10%, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp lighting effect (the chance lamp 48 is kept in the off state). Also, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a change in the story loss (that is, if the received start winning command is "SC012"), the effect control microcomputer 121, at a rate of 7%, emits light of "purple" and Decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with “sequential lighting”, decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with “yellow” light emission color and “sequential lighting” at a rate of 9%, and 1%. 3% decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect with the “purple” light emitting color and “all lighting”, and 3% of the time, the “yellow” light emitting color and “all lighting”. It is decided to execute it, and 80% of the time, it is decided not to execute the chance lamp lighting effect (the chance lamp 48 is kept in the off state). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the story reach is performed, the chance lamp lighting effect of simultaneous lighting is higher than the chance lamp lighting effect of sequential lighting.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, when the chance lamp light emitting effect of sequentially lighting is executed as the look-ahead effect, the battle reach is achieved in the variable effect based on the special figure hold which is the trigger for the execution of the look-ahead effect. When (an example of the first specific effect) is executed, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the story reach (an example of the second specific effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the chance lamp light emitting effect of simultaneous lighting is executed as the look-ahead effect, the battle reach is executed if the story reach is executed in the variable effect based on the special figure hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect. Expectations for jackpots are higher than expected. Therefore, when the chance lamp light emitting effect is executed, there is a strong interest in whether the battle reach is executed or the story reach is executed in the variable effect based on the special figure hold that triggered the execution of the chance lamp light emitting effect. It is possible to have a game, a monotonous game is prevented, and an improvement in game interest can be expected.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the role of sequential lighting of the chance lamps 48 may be given to purple light emission, and the role of simultaneous lighting may be given to yellow light emission. In this case, light emission in purple corresponds to the first mode among the light emission modes of the chance lamp 48, and light emission in yellow corresponds to the second mode.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48-50. In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the navel lamp 46 may emit light in a color different from the display color of the hold display displayed in the hold change effect. It differs from the pachinko game machine of the embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined to execute the pending change effect in the execution lottery of the pending change effect based on the look-ahead determination, the final display mode of the pending display is blue pending (blue pending display) and red pending. In addition to (red hold display), green hold (green hold display) may be selected, and this green hold has a higher jackpot expectation than blue hold and a lower jackpot expectation than red hold. shall be executed as In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment can make the navel lamp 46 emit light not only in blue or red, but also in green.

The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment performs lottery for a pending change scenario based on the table shown in FIG. A pending change scenario defines the timing of a pending change. Specifically, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is when red suspension is selected as the final display mode of the suspension display, and when the target suspension occurs as the fourth special figure 1 suspension, the scenario Select one of 01 to 04. Scenario 01 (distribution rate of 25%) is a scenario in which red reserve is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 02 (distribution rate of 25%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to red reserve at the time of shift display to hold 3. Scenario 03 (distribution rate 25%) displays blue hold at the time of starting winning, changes to green hold when shift display to hold 3, and further changes to red hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario. Scenario 04 (distribution rate 25%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning, changes to green hold when the shift display to hold 3 is displayed, and further changes to red hold during the change.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the red hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, when the target hold occurs as the third special figure 1 hold, scenarios 05 to 07 is selected. Scenario 05 (distribution rate of 34%) is a scenario in which red reserve is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 06 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to red reserve at the time of shift display to hold 2 . Scenario 07 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold at the time of starting winning, changes to blue hold when shift display to hold 2, and further changes to red hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when the red hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, when the target hold occurs as the second special figure 1 hold, scenario 08 ~ 09 is selected. Scenario 08 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which red reserve is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 09 (distribution rate 50%) displays normal hold at the time of starting winning, changes to green hold when shift display to hold 1, and further changes to red hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario. In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when red hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the first special figure 1 hold, scenarios 10 to Choose one of 11. Scenario 10 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which red reserve is displayed from the start winning. Scenario 11 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which blue reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to red reserve during the fluctuation.

In addition, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the green hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, when the target hold occurs as the fourth special figure 1 hold, scenarios 21 to Choose any of the 25. Scenario 21 (distribution rate of 20%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed from the start winning. Scenario 22 (distribution rate of 20%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green reserve at the time of shift display to hold 3 . Scenario 23 (distribution rate of 20%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green hold at the time of shift display to hold 3. Scenario 24 (distribution rate 20%) displays normal hold at the time of starting winning, changes to blue hold when shift display to hold 3, and further changes to green hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario. Scenario 25 (distribution rate of 20%) is a scenario in which normal suspension is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green suspension during the variation.

Also, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the green hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the third special figure 1 hold, scenarios 26 to 28 is selected. Scenario 26 (distribution rate of 34%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 27 (distribution rate of 33%) is a scenario in which blue reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green reserve at the time of shift display to hold 2 . Scenario 28 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold when starting winning, changes to blue hold when shift display to hold 2, and green hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario.

Also, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the green hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, and the target hold occurs as the second special figure 1 hold, scenarios 29 to 31 is selected. Scenario 29 (distribution rate of 34%) is a scenario in which green suspension is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 30 (distribution rate of 33%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green hold at the time of shift display to hold 1. Scenario 31 (distribution rate 33%) displays normal hold at the time of starting winning, changes to blue hold when shift display to hold 1, and green hold during the change (special figure change related to target hold) It is a changing scenario. Also, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the green hold is selected as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the first special figure 1 hold, scenarios 32 to 33 is selected. Scenario 32 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which green reserve is displayed from the time of the start winning. Scenario 33 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which blue reserve is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to green reserve during the fluctuation.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment selects the blue hold as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the fourth special figure 1 hold, scenarios 41 to 43 is selected. Scenario 41 (distribution rate of 34%) is a scenario in which blue suspension is displayed from the time of the start winning. Scenario 42 (distribution rate of 33%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to blue hold at the time of shift display to hold 3 . Scenario 43 (distribution rate 33%) is a scenario in which normal suspension is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to blue suspension during the variation (special figure variation related to target suspension).

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment selects the blue hold as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the third special figure 1 hold, scenarios 44 to 45 are selected. Scenario 44 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which blue reserve is displayed from the time of the start winning. Scenario 45 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of starting winning and changes to blue hold at the time of shift display to hold 2 . In addition, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment selects the blue hold as the final display mode of the hold display, and when the target hold occurs as the second special figure 1 hold, scenario 46 to 47 is selected. Scenario 46 (distribution rate of 50%) is a scenario in which blue suspension is displayed from the time of starting winning. Scenario 47 (distribution rate 50%) is a scenario in which normal hold is displayed at the time of start winning and changes to blue hold at the time of shift display to hold 1. In addition, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when blue suspension is selected as the final display mode of the suspension display, and when the target suspension occurs as the first special figure 1 suspension, scenario 48 select. Scenario 48 (distribution rate 100%) is a scenario in which blue suspension is displayed from the time of starting winning.

Scenarios 02, 03, 06, 11, 22, 27, and 33 are intended to display a special display mode suspension display (blue suspension, green suspension, or red suspension) from the time of starting winning. It is a scenario in which multiple pending changes occur until the special figure fluctuation based on the target pending ends, including the pending change at the time of starting winning. When these scenarios are selected and it is determined to execute the navel lamp lighting effect (lottery based on the table shown in FIG. 39), the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment further performs A lottery will be held to determine the emission color of the belly button light emitting effect (referred to as the belly button light emitting effect when winning a prize). Specifically, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the "scenario No." In one case, if the result of the look-ahead determination is a big hit variation, 'green' is selected at a rate of 70% and 'blue' is selected at a rate of 30% as the emission color of the navel lamp 46 at the start winning. On the other hand, if the result of the look-ahead judgment is a loss variation with reach, select "green" at a rate of 30% and "blue" at a rate of 70% as the emission color of the navel lamp 46 at the time of starting winning. select. When the display mode of the pending display is further changed at a timing other than the start winning (during shift display, during the change), the navel lamp 46 emits light in the same color as the display mode after the change.

Thus, in this embodiment, when scenario 02, 03, 06, 11, 22, 27, or 33 is selected as the hold change scenario, the display color of the hold display and the emission color of the navel lamp 46 are different colors. can be The expectation of a big win is higher when the luminescent color of the navel lamp 46 at the start winning is "green" than when it is "blue". Therefore, even if the blue reservation is displayed at the start winning, when the navel lamp 46 emits green light, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation for the big hit is high, and the special figure based on the target reservation. It is possible to expect that the game will change to green reservation or red reservation by the time the fluctuation ends, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, an execution example of an effect in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 shows an effect execution example when the winning to the first starting port 11 which triggers the execution of the look-ahead effect occurs as the fourth special figure 1 pending. Production execution example 11 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 hold, holding change production with the final display mode as red hold, belly button light emission production, and purple and simultaneous lighting This is an example when it is decided to execute the chance lamp lighting effect. Scenario 02 is selected in the holding change scenario lottery, and blue is selected in the luminescent color lottery of the belly button light emission effect at the time of winning. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays green pending on the display unit 50a at the time of start winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in blue, and lights the chance lamps 48 in purple and all at once. Then, at the time of shift display to hold 3, the green hold is changed to red hold, and the navel lamp 46 is lit in the same red color as the display color of the hold display. In this example of effect, the green pending display is displayed at the time of the initial winning, but the navel lamp 46 is lit in blue, so that the player may recognize that he/she cannot expect to win the jackpot very much. At the time of shift display to , the red reservation is displayed and the navel lamp 46 lights up in red, so that the expectation for winning the jackpot increases at once. Therefore, an improvement in amusement is expected.

In addition, production execution example 12 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 hold, holding change production with the final display mode as red hold, belly button light emission production, and purple and all at once This is an example of a case where it is decided to execute the lighting chance lamp lighting effect. Scenario 03 is selected in the holding change scenario lottery, and green is selected in the luminescent color lottery for the belly button light emission effect at the time of winning. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays blue pending on the display unit 50a at the time of start winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in green, and lights the chance lamps 48 in purple and all at once. Then, when shift display to hold 3 is made, blue hold is changed to green hold. At this time, the navel lamp 46 is kept lit in green. After that, green reservation is changed to red reservation during the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation, and the navel lamp 46 is lit in the same red color as the display color of the reservation display. In this example of presentation, the reservation display is displayed in blue reservation at the time of starting winning, but the navel lamp 46 is lit in green, so that the player can recognize that he is likely to expect to win a jackpot despite the blue reservation. Then, it changes to red reservation during the special figure fluctuation based on the target reservation, and the navel lamp 46 is also lit in red, so that the variation performance can be seen with a high expectation for winning the jackpot. As a result, an improvement in amusement in games can be expected.

In addition, the effect execution example 13 shown in FIG. 50 is based on the foreseeing determination at the time of occurrence of the fourth special figure 1 suspension, and the final display mode is a suspension change effect with green suspension, navel lamp light emission effect, and purple and all at once This is an example of a case where it is decided to execute the lighting chance lamp lighting effect. Scenario 22 is selected in the holding change scenario lottery, and green is selected in the luminescent color lottery of the belly button light emission effect at the time of winning. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays blue pending on the display unit 50a at the time of start winning, lights the navel lamp 46 in green, and lights the chance lamps 48 in purple and all at once. Then, when the shift display to the hold 3 is made, the blue hold is changed to the green hold, and the navel lamp 46 is kept lit in green. In this example of performance as well, since the blue reservation is displayed in the reservation display at the time of the start winning, but the navel lamp 46 is lit in green, the player can recognize that the blue reservation is likely to be expected to win the jackpot. By changing to the green reservation when the shift display to the reservation 3 is made, it is possible to strengthen the expectation for winning the jackpot. As a result, an improvement in amusement in games can be expected.

According to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment described above, even if the navel lamp 46 emits light in a color that does not correspond to the display color of the pending display at the time of winning to the first start port 11, the first start port 11 When the display color of the pending display further changes at a timing other than the winning timing (during shift display, during the change), the display color of the pending display and the emission color of the navel lamp 46 correspond to each other. Therefore, when the display color of the hold display and the light emission color of the navel lamp 46 correspond to each other, the relevance between the two effects is emphasized, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

It should be noted that the lottery table (FIG. 48) for the pending scenario and the lottery table (FIG. 49) for the belly button lighting effect at the time of winning are only examples, and can be changed as appropriate.

<Other change examples>
In the above embodiment, even if the hold change effect is executed, the belly button light emission effect may not be executed in conjunction with it (see FIG. 39), but the configuration is such that the belly lamp light effect is always executed in conjunction with the hold change effect. good too. In this case, the execution probability of the pending change effect and the execution probability of the belly button light emission effect are the same.

Further, in the above embodiment, the heso lamp 46 is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win based on the difference in the emission color. , different lighting patterns such as high-speed blinking, etc.) may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in the above embodiment, the chance lamp 48 is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win based on the difference in the luminous color and the difference in the luminous mode other than the luminous color. It may be assumed that

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the chance lamp 48 emits light, the chance lamp 46 emits light. A configuration may be adopted in which a higher degree of expectation for a big win is more likely to be suggested when is emitted, or the likelihood of suggesting a higher degree of expectation for a big win may be the same in both cases.

In addition, in the above-described form, the display color of the pending display (holding icon HA, the icon TA) is different from the normal display mode in the pending change effect. may be a change in shape, a change in size, a change in pattern, or the like, and may not be a change in display color. Alternatively, a combination of a change other than the display color and a change in the display color may be used. Even if the change in the display mode of the pending display is a change other than the display color, the navel lamp 46 may emit light in a predetermined emission color at the timing when the display mode of the pending display is changed. It should be noted that the emission color of the navel lamp 46 can be appropriately set.

In the above embodiment, the luminescent color of the chance lamp 48 is all different from the luminescent color of the heso lamp 46, but the luminescent color of the chance lamp 48 may include the same color as the luminescent color of the heso lamp 46. . In this case, all the luminescent colors of the chance lamp 48 may be the same color as the luminescent color of the navel lamp 46 . It is preferable that the order of the expected jackpot levels between the same colors as the luminescent color of the heso lamp 46 included in the luminescent color of the chance lamp 48 follows the order of the expected levels of the jackpot of each luminescent color of the navel lamp 46 .

In the above embodiment, sequential lighting (for details, clockwise sequential lighting, see FIG. 41) and all-at-once lighting are adopted as lighting modes other than the luminescent color of the chance lamp 48, but blinking and counterclockwise sequential lighting are adopted. , etc., may be adopted. When a type other than sequential lighting and simultaneous lighting is adopted, the first mode and the second mode as light emission modes other than the light emission color of the chance lamp 48 may be appropriately selected.

Further, in the above embodiment, the types of display colors of the pending display can be increased or decreased as appropriate. In addition, it is preferable to appropriately increase or decrease the kind of luminescent color of the navel lamp 46 so as to correspond to the kind of the display color of the hold display.

Further, in the above-described form, the execution probability of various effects such as holding change effect, navel lamp light effect, chance lamp light effect, etc. and the distribution rate of the mode of effect can be appropriately changed within the range where the purpose of each effect can be achieved. Specifically, for example, with regard to the lottery tables (FIGS. 40 and 47) of the chance lamp light emission effect in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the result of the prefetch determination is a loss variation. In this case, each distribution rate of “purple and sequentially lit”, “yellow and sequentially lit”, “purple and simultaneous lighting”, and “yellow and simultaneous lighting” may be set to 5% each. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make the chance lamp lighting effect more likely to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than the navel lamp lighting effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the belly button light emission effect is executed, it is always configured to be interlocked with the hold change effect, but the belly lamp light effect may be executed independently of the hold change effect. In this case, the execution probability of the belly button lighting effect may be set to the same extent as in the above mode.

In the above embodiment, the navel lamp 46 is an example of the first light emitting portion and the chance lamp 48 is an example of the second light emitting portion. Alternatively, both the chance lamp 48 and the frame lamp 53 may constitute the second light emitting portion. That is, each light-emitting unit (first light-emitting unit, second light-emitting unit) may be a light-emitting unit group including a plurality of light-emitting units. may be

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the holding change effect, navel lamp lighting effect, and chance lamp lighting effect are executed as the look-ahead effects related to the first starting port 11, but these effects are the look-ahead effects related to the second starting port 12. can be run as

In addition, in the above-described form, the holding change effect, the belly button light emission effect, and the chance lamp light emission effect are configured to be executable in the low probability non-time-saving state, but in other game states such as the high probability time-saving state and the low probability time-saving state It may be an executable configuration.

10. Inventions shown in the first embodiment and modifications thereof The above-described first embodiment and modifications thereof (including the second and third embodiments) show inventions of the following means. there is In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix. Note that means A is a general term for means A1 to A5 below. Means B is a general term for means B1 to B4 below. Means C is a general term for means C1 to C3 below.

Means A1:
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A first light emitting unit (navel lamp 46) and a second light emitting unit (chance lamp 48) that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
There are cases where the first light-emitting portion emits light and the second light-emitting portion emits light (see FIG. 42) when a prize is won in a predetermined starting hole (first starting hole 11). game machine.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, since there are a plurality of light-emitting parts that emit light in response to winning a prize in a predetermined starting hole, it is possible to make the player interested in which light-emitting part emits light. is expected to improve.

Means A2:
The gaming machine according to means A1,
It is easier to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher when the second light emitting unit emits light than when the first light emitting unit emits light (see FIGS. 37, 39, and 40). Characteristic game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the second light emitting unit emits light in response to winning a prize in the predetermined starting hole, it is expected that the control is performed in a more advantageous state than when the first light emitting unit emits light. Since it is easy to suggest that the degree is high, when the second light emitting part emits light, the player's sense of anticipation can be greatly stimulated, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Means A3:
The gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first light emitting portion (navel lamp 46) can suggest different expectations depending on the difference in light emission color (see FIGS. 37 and 39).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the first light emitting section can easily suggest the degree of expectation by the difference in the light emission color.

Means A4:
The gaming machine according to means A3,
The second light emitting unit (chance lamp 48) is capable of suggesting different expectations depending on the difference in light emitting mode (sequential lighting or simultaneous lighting) other than the color of light emitted (see FIG. 40). machine.

According to the amusement machine with this configuration, the second light-emitting portion suggests the degree of expectation by a method different from that of the first light-emitting portion (difference in light-emitting mode other than light-emitting color). As compared with a configuration in which the degree of expectation is suggested only by color, it is possible to increase the diversity of presentation and to expect an improvement in the amusement of the game.

Means A5:
The gaming machine according to means A4,
When executing a first specific effect (battle reach, see FIG. 34) and when executing a second specific effect (story reach, see FIG. 35) as effects indicating whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state. there is
When the light emission mode other than the light emission color of the second light emitting unit (chance lamp 48) is the first mode (sequential lighting), the second specific effect is performed when the first specific effect is executed. said expectation is higher than when is executed,
When the light emission mode other than the light emission color of the second light emitting unit is the second mode (simultaneous lighting), when the second specific effect is executed than when the first specific effect is executed A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation is higher (see FIG. 47).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the second light emitting unit emits light in the first mode in response to winning a prize in the predetermined starting hole, the second specific effect is executed when the first specific effect is executed. However, when the second light emitting unit emits light in the second mode, the execution of the second specific effect is more expected than the execution of the first specific effect. Since the intensity is high, the combination of the light emission mode of the second light emitting part and the type of the specific performance can be made interesting, the performance is less likely to be considered monotonous, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Means B1:
Equipped with a specific light emitting unit (navel lamp 46) that can emit light when winning a prize in a predetermined start port (first start port 11),
It is possible to display a pending display (holding icon HA, the icon TA) according to the winning in the predetermined starting port,
The holding display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (normal holding, blue holding, red holding) with different expectations controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Light emission of the specific light emitting unit in response to changing the display mode of the pending display at a predetermined timing (during shift display, during the change) other than the timing at which the predetermined start opening has been won. is possible (see FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the specific light-emitting unit capable of emitting light upon winning the predetermined starting hole, even at a predetermined timing other than the timing at which the winning to the predetermined starting hole occurs, the pending display. Since the light may be emitted according to the change of the display mode, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest in the game.

Means B2:
The gaming machine according to means B1,
The change in the display mode of the pending display includes a change in the display color of the pending display (see FIG. 37),
When the specific light-emitting unit is caused to emit light in response to changing the display mode of the suspension display at the predetermined timing, the specific light-emitting unit is caused to emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the suspension display after the change ( See FIG. 39).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific light-emitting unit emits light at a timing other than the winning timing to the starting hole, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display color of the pending display after the change. The relevance with the light-emitting part can be easily conveyed to the player, the excitement of the presentation can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Means B3:
The gaming machine according to means B2,
When the holding display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, blue holding) at the timing when the winning to the predetermined starting port occurs, a color that does not correspond to the display color of the holding display (for example, green ) can cause the specific light emitting portion (navel lamp 46) to emit light (see, for example, effect execution example 12 in FIG. 50).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, even if the specific light-emitting part emits light in a color not corresponding to the display color of the pending display when a prize is won in a predetermined starting port, the pending display is performed at a timing other than the timing of winning a prize in the starting port. If the display color of is further changed, the display color of the reserved display and the luminescent color of the specific light emitting unit will correspond, so when the display color of the reserved display and the luminescent color of the specific light emitting unit correspond The relationship between the two presentations is emphasized, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Means B4:
The gaming machine according to means B2,
When the holding display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode (for example, red holding) at the timing when the winning to the predetermined starting port occurs, the color corresponding to the display color of the holding display (for example, red ) can cause the specific light emitting unit to emit light (see, for example, effect execution example 4 shown in FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, since the specific light emitting part emits light in a color corresponding to the display color of the pending display from the time of winning the predetermined starting hole, the relationship between the specific light emitting part and the pending display is more enhanced. It is expected that the game will be enhanced and the interest in the game will be improved.

Means C1:
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A first light emitting part (navel lamp 46) and a second light emitting part (chance lamp 48) that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state by a difference in emitted color,
There are cases where the first light-emitting portion emits light and the second light-emitting portion emits light (see FIG. 42) when a prize is won in a predetermined starting hole (first starting hole 11). game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, there are a plurality of light-emitting units that can indicate the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state by the difference in light-emitting colors, and that emit light in accordance with the winning of a prize in a predetermined starting port. , the player can be interested in which light emitting part emits light in what color, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

Means C2:
The gaming machine according to means C1,
When the first light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined emission color (for example, red), the second light emitting unit may emit light in a different emission color (for example, purple) from the predetermined emission color (for example, (Refer to effect execution example 9 shown in FIG. 42).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit may emit light in different colors depending on the winning in the predetermined starting hole, so the variety of effects is improved. It is expected that the interest in gaming will increase.

Means C3:
The gaming machine according to means C2,
It is possible to display a pending display (holding icon HA, the icon TA) according to the winning in the predetermined starting port,
The pending display can be displayed in any of a plurality of display colors (blue, red) with different expectations of being controlled to the advantageous state,
The luminescent color of the first light-emitting portion (navel lamp 46) corresponds to the display color of the suspension display (see FIG. 39),
A gaming machine characterized in that the color of light emitted from the second light emitting portion (chance lamp 48) does not correspond to the display color of the hold display (see FIG. 40).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the light emission color of the first light emitting unit capable of emitting light in response to winning in the predetermined starting port corresponds to the display color of the hold display. The relevance of the display and the production is enhanced. In addition, since the color of light emitted from the second light emitting unit does not correspond to the color of the display of the pending display, even if the display color of the pending display is a color with a low degree of expectation, the color of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is advantageous. It is possible to create a sense of expectation to be controlled by As a result, an improvement in amusement is expected.

By the way, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-150713, the movable body under the starting opening is rotated according to the ball entering the first starting opening. In addition, there is known a game machine capable of executing a prize-winning effect of blinking a lamp under the starting mouth. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine that performs an effect in response to the entry of a ball into a starting hole, such as the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-150713, in order to improve the amusement of the game.

The above-described means A provides the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-150713 with "when the first light emitting unit emits light and when the second light emitting unit emits light when winning a prize in a predetermined start opening. It is different in that there are cases where In addition, the above-described means B is provided for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-150713, "provided with a specific light emitting unit capable of emitting light when winning a prize to a predetermined start opening, It is possible to cause a specific light-emitting unit to emit light in response to changing the display mode of the pending icon at a predetermined timing other than the timing at which . In addition, the above-described means C provides the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-150713 as "a first method capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the player is controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the light emission color. It has a light-emitting part and a second light-emitting part, and there are cases where the first light-emitting part emits light and there are cases where the second light-emitting part emits light when winning a prize in a predetermined starting hole. there is As a result, the inventions of the means A to C can solve the problem of "improving the interest of the game" (provide action and effect).

11. Fourth Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 66. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof is omitted. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment has a 7-segment display device 300 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, which can display a so-called normal base, and is equipped with an over-prize preventing function.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment is a so-called V-Ken ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot game including a round game that opens the second big prize hole 15, and in the round game that opens the second big prize hole 15, V passes (to the specific area 16 If there is a passage), turn on the probability variation flag (flag indicating high probability state) and time saving flag (flag indicating time saving state) at the end of the jackpot game (to high probability high base state ) along with the probability variation counter (a counter that counts the upper limit number of special figure fluctuations in a high probability state) and a short time counter (a counter that counts the upper limit number of special figure fluctuations in a short time state) are both set to "160", If there is no V passage during the jackpot game, only the time-saving flag is turned ON at the end of the jackpot game (to a low-probability-high base state), and the time-saving counter is set to "160".

<Display on 7-segment display>
First, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 9) in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio of the normal total prize balls won by the player in the normal game state and the normal shot balls fired by the player in the normal game state, is expressed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. In the 7-segment display 300, a base other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state and the number of time-saving balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, jackpot game The jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls won by the player in the jackpot state and the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in the jackpot gaming state, is not displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 always counts the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.). The total number of shot balls is calculated by counting the detection of the outlet sensor by the game control microcomputer 101 . The normal number of shot balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the ejection port sensor only in the normal game state. The normal total number of prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The information on the number of normal shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normal prize balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 (see FIG. 6) of the game RAM 104. reference) in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are maintained (not erased). Thus, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base by using the normal number of shot balls when the power is cut off and the normal total number of prize balls when the power is cut off. Then, the game control microcomputer 101, regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability base state, etc.) It is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 9)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of shot balls into 60,000 rounds. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 is the first normal base. After that, when the total number of balls shot exceeds 60,001, the initial normal base value is stored as the previous normal base value. Then, the normal base calculated from 60,001 to 120,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 120,001, the normal base value of the previous round is stored as the normal base value of the previous two rounds, and the current normal base value is stored as the normal base of the previous round. be. Then, the normal base calculated from 120,001 to 180,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 180,001, the value of the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base value 3 times before, and the value of the normal base value 1 time before is used as the normal base value 2 times before. stored, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated when the total number of shot balls increased from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base 3 times before is erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base 3 times before, and the value that was the normal base 3 times before The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. Then, the normal base calculated from 240,001 to 300,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, similarly, the normal base is calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the values of the normal base up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104 at maximum. I can let you. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101, on the 7-segment display 300, the current normal base ⇒ 1st previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 The display is switched every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 (see FIG. 9)), the right two digits (the third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340) display the current normal base. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) shown in the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the current normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 displays "b1" in the left two digits and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base one time before.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b2" in the left two digits and the two previous normal base in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base two times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base two times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits and the normal base three times ago in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base three times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base three times before was started, as described above, the 7-segment display 300 displays "bL" in the left two digits and the current display in the right two digits. is displayed and so on.

Also, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of shot balls has been 300 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the right two digits. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and when the total number of shot balls exceeds 300, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the value of the normal base denominator (the number of normal shot balls) is too small to avoid displaying the unreliable normal base value. there is Even if the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the number of normal shots has been 6000 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the left two digits indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3". ” flashes. After that, when the number of normal shot balls exceeds 6000 after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the left two digits are lit. In this way, when the person who confirms the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 is shown the blinking mode of the left two digits, the normal base value indicated by the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. It is possible to have the user grasp that the value is not a value. In other words, when the lighting mode is shown in the left two digits to a person who checks the normal base, the value of the normal base shown in the right two digits is a value that converges to some extent. It is possible to

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. FIG. After that, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position, the setting mode is terminated and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340 . Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the display of the normal base is started. As described above, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the initial display is performed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 9) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, the 7-segment display 300 indicates "8.8.8.8.". In this way, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-prizing prevention function>
Next, the over-prize prevention function in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 can activate the over-prize preventing function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prized ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unexecutable on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific count number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player acquires (pays out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) is. The total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to put out to the player, but it means the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. can be The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states, as described above.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of prize balls is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of shot balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. is stored in the total shot ball number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on to calculate the difference number of balls, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is It is stored in the difference number storage section 107c (see FIG. 6) provided in the non-erase storage section 107 of the RAM 104 for use.

Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the number of difference balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 treats the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of shot balls is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (the process of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 57), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (process of step S109 to be described later, see FIG. 57) is also stopped. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played because the game ball is not shot even if the handle 72k is rotated. In addition, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, and stops receiving signals corresponding to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and displays 8 and 7 segments. The display control of the indicator 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control board 170 .

After the over-prize preventing function is activated, the state in which the game cannot be played continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the over-prize prevention function is canceled on the condition that the RAM is cleared. In other words, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the employee of the game parlor cuts off the power by turning off the power switch 193 . The employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 191 when turning on the power switch 193 to turn on the power. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by executing the RAM clear. Thus, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game cannot be restarted only by turning the power OFF and ON (returning on), and the game can be restarted by executing the RAM clear. can.

Next, the timing at which the over-prize prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. The over-prized ball prevention function is activated when the advantageous game state advantageous to the player shifts to the normal game state on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 or more. In other words, at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80000, the over-prized ball prevention function does not necessarily operate. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability base state after a big win game or a low-probability base state after a big win game.

For example, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 51(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Next, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 51(B). At this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of shifting from the big winning game state to the high-probability/high-base state, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 51(C), when it comes to the timing of shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. In this way, in this form, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the middle of the high-probability-high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing for the player to end the advantageous game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, information on the number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasing storage unit 107, and the number of difference number is not reset (cleared) by turning the power OFF and ON. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the number of difference balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, even during business hours, there is a situation in which the power is turned off and on (returned on) or the RAM is cleared due to a bug, failure, serious fraud, or the like. In such a situation, if the number of difference balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the provision of the over-prize preventing function would be meaningless. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, the player who restarts the game after that may receive an unfair advantage that the over-prized balls prevention function will not operate easily. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from receiving the above-described unfair advantage, turning on the power again or clearing the RAM does not reset the difference ball number.

Next, conditions for resetting the number of difference balls will be described with reference to FIG. In this form, there are two reset conditions for resetting the number of difference balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 52(A). That is, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. do. In addition, when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the number of total prize balls and the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a The information on the total number of shot balls stored in the number-of-shot-balls storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "resetting (clearing) the number of difference balls". In addition, in FIG. 52(A), when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down in the customer waiting state, the number of difference balls is reset. However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference ball number is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 52(A). That is, if the game is not played for one hour after shifting to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 deletes the information on the difference number of balls stored in the difference number of balls storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. clear. The customer waiting state is a game state in which the game is not executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), it is assumed that a certain player's game reaches 70000 in the jackpot game state. After that, when a certain player shifts from the jackpot game state to the normal game state through the high probability/high base state, the game is finished. In this case, if the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000), the over-prize prevention function can be activated for the player who starts the next game, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(A), pressing the special reset switch 181 resets the difference ball number. As a result, the employee of the game hall can press the special reset switch 181 at an arbitrary timing after finishing the game of a certain player to reset the number of difference balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 52(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference number of balls is automatically reset. As a result, it is possible to reset the difference number of balls without imposing an operation burden for the reset on the employee of the game arcade. In this way, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the player who starts the game next from being extremely disadvantageous because the over-prize preventing function is activated immediately after starting the game. It is possible.

Next, an effect mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 53(A). When the over-prize preventing function is activated, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM." is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. Thus, the effect mode shown in FIG. 53(A) enables the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 53(A) continues until the power is cut off. The effect mode shown in FIG. 53(A) is canceled when the RAM is cleared, but is continued as it is only by turning on the power again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the case when illegal magnetism is detected will be described. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the shooting control process related to the game, in the same way as when activating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, the state in which the game cannot be executed due to the magnetism detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again). can do.

Next, an effect mode when illegal magnetism is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 53(B). When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error 1: Abnormal magnetism detection. Power on again. Please” is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, comparing the presentation mode when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated (see FIG. 53(A)) and the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 53(B)), the release method Other than the images, they are the same. Therefore, the employee or the player of the game hall is made to recognize that the game cannot be executed both when the illicit magnetism is detected and when the over-prize preventing function is activated. can be made easier.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 70000 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(A). First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, a purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and an overpayment indicating "abnormal overpayment with 10000 remaining shots" at the bottom of the display section 50a. A ball notice image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize notice image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation in which the over-prize prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple edge image EFa is continued even after the jackpot game state is over, but the display of the over-prize ball foretelling image KY is finished when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 80000 will be described with reference to FIG. 54(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(B). As shown in FIG. 54B, the display section 50a displays a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000, a red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the rush" at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know when the game is about to stop and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb is continued even after the jackpot game state ends, but the display of the game stop notice image KH is finished when the jackpot game state ends. It should be noted that the game stop notice image KH may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the number of difference balls reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(A), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 55(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple-rimmed image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000.

Also, after the number of difference balls reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 51(B), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 55(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a description will be given of an effect mode when the difference ball number is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. FIG. In this case, an employee of the game arcade opens the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22 and presses down the special reset switch 181 . Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error canceling method image ER2 indicating "Error 2 Please close the front door" is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 56(A). is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(B), a description will be given of an effect mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible to let the employee of the game arcade know that the difference number of balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 executes what is shown in FIG. 57 as main side timer interrupt processing (S005).

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The main side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), it is first determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned on when the over-prize preventing function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unexecutable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is executed. That is, it is in a playable state.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 25), the game stop flag is switched to OFF when the RAM clear is executed in the ON state. On the other hand, the game stop flag remains ON unless the RAM clear is executed while it is ON. That is, the state of the game stop flag does not change only by turning on the power again. In this way, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear is executed after the game stop flag is turned ON by the operation of the over-prize preventing function.

When the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102) to be described later is executed. Then, after performing the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the sensor detection process (S104), and the normal operation process (S105), the later-described difference ball number measurement process (S106), the later-described special operation process ( S107) is executed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a distribution device control process (S108), and executes a launch control process (S109) for controlling launch of game balls. By executing the shooting control process (S109), the player can shoot the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the shooting control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be shot even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display of the 7-segment display device 300. FIG. Next, an error process (S111) is executed to determine an error (illegal) due to magnetic detection, an error due to opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m, and the like. In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected incorrect magnetism. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error processing (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs output processing (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processing (S113). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power cut-off monitoring process (S114) when the power is turned off, and ends this process. In the power failure monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is cut off due to the drop in the monitoring voltage, the game information, information on the total number of winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls, and the number of difference balls information, game stop flag information, and the like are stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 . After that, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 58, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether or not the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether or not a signal based on the depression of the special reset switch 181 has been received. (S201). If not ON (NO in S201), proceed to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erasing clear process (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erase clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erase storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of game RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. In step S204, other processes are executed and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Difference Number of Balls Counting Process] As shown in FIG. 59, in the difference number of balls measurement process (S106), first, the total number of prize balls count process for counting the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is executed (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 6). Next, based on the detection by the outlet sensor, the total number of shot balls is counted (S302). Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total shot number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 6). Then, the total number of shot balls is subtracted from the total number of prize balls, and the number of difference balls is calculated (S303). Information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 6).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether or not the over-prize ball notice flag is OFF. The over-prize notice flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 70000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 70000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70000 (NO in S305), proceed to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notice flag is turned ON (S306), and the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. The over-prize flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more (S309). If the number is less than 80000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S310). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S312), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red edge image EFb and the game stop notification image KH are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 54(B).

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 60, in the special action processing (S107), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device (first big winning device 14D, second big winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special symbol standby including processing such as performing a jackpot determination and starting variable display of special symbols. Processing (S1302) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special design fluctuation processing including processing such as stopping display of special design (S1304) If the "special action status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), a special symbol determination process (S1306) including processing such as shifting the game state is performed, If the "special action status" is "4" (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big winning opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 61, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (YES in S1401), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 11 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). And, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the customer is waiting. If it is ON (YES at S1416), a customer waiting measurement process, which will be described later, is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO at S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this processing ends.

In step S1401, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 (special figure 2 reservation information ), if there is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b corresponds to the first reservation Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special figure stop design data set in the special figure 2 big hit determination process (S1402) Information and special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) information of the variation pattern set in (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information of special 2, If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 start port 11 (reservation information of special figure 1), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) and special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a corresponds to the fourth reservation Clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the read side) (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) is the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408) Information and information (information including information on fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1409) is included.

When proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process for clearing (resetting) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" is executed (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the game RAM 104 and is used to measure the duration of the customer waiting state. It should be noted that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned on again regardless of whether or not the RAM clear is executed.

[Customer Waiting Measurement Processing] As shown in FIG. 62, in the customer waiting measurement processing (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increase processing for increasing the value of the customer waiting counter is executed (S1420). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has continued for one hour or more. If it is determined not to continue (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it continues (YES in S1421), the non-erase clear process is executed (S1422) as in the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 58). As a result, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c are stored. Information on the number of difference balls is cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1423), and this process ends. Thus, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 63, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), first, the special symbol stop time (stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it has not passed (NO in S1901), this process is terminated immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process, which will be described later, is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing following step S1904 (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time saving state. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909), and this process is finished.

[Playing State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 64, in the playing state management processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" Judge (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result of step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (YES in S2005), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0". (S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), turn off the time saving flag (S2008) and proceed to step S2009. If the determination result of step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 80000 or more. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010), and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 53(A). Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished.

In step S2012, the game state specifying command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 65, in the output processing (S112), outer edge signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in each processing described above are output to the sub control board 120 and the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer End Signal Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 66, in the outer end signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-price announcement flag is ON (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notice flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer end signal output process for overly awarded ball notice (S3102), the main control board 100 outputs an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for overly awarded ball notice"). , is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-notifying outer end signal to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game hall who is monitoring the hall computer is informed of a situation in which the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000) in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is possible to comprehend.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 80000. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), an over-prize ball outer end signal output process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the over-prize ball outer end signal output process (S3104), an outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "over-prize ball outer end signal") indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 is paid out from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-ball announcement outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game hall who is monitoring the hall computer is told that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment and that the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends. It is possible to make the player grasp the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is in an unexecutable state. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES in S3105), an outer end signal output process for game stop is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function is mainly It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the non-erase clear processing shown in step S203 or the non-erase clear processing shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information stored in the difference storage unit 107c It is determined whether or not the information on the difference number of balls has been cleared. If the non-erase clear process has not been executed (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if the non-erase clear process has been executed (YES in S3107), the reset outer end signal output process is executed (S3108), and the process proceeds to step S3109. In the reset outer end signal output process (S3108), an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer end signal") is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the resetting outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the number of difference balls has been reset in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an over-prize ball notice outer end signal, an over-prize ball outer end signal, and a game stop outer end signal , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

<Action and effect of the fourth embodiment>
As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, or in the middle of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, and there is no particular big disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment that does not award excessive prize balls while allowing the player to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop playing.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability base state, low probability height base state) ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the end of the high base state and before the number of balls in his possession decreases. In other words, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of shot balls increases, and a situation can be assumed in which the difference number of balls becomes less than 80,000. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends so that the above situation does not occur.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, and the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more immediately after the player who plays later starts playing, it will be a terrible situation. situation. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the measured difference number of balls is reset based on the satisfaction of the reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour, the difference number of balls is reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the employee of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on, game information (for example, game state information such as high probability state, special figure pending information such as the number of wins and the judgment result of the jackpot) is erased, but the information of the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even if the game information must be deleted due to a problem or the like during business hours, it is possible not to delete the calculated difference number of balls.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, even if the RAM clear is executed, the measured difference ball number is not erased. However, when an employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181, the measured difference ball number can be deleted. In this way, the employee of the game hall can delete the measured number of difference balls at any timing.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
A modification of the fourth embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the fourth embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the fourth embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications (including the second and third embodiments) is within the range that does not interfere with the game, the fourth embodiment and It can be adopted in a game machine grasped from the modified example.

In the fourth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V certain machine (a gaming machine controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol It may be configured as a gaming machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined by In addition, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends according to the number of times the special symbol changes), but once it is controlled to the high probability state, the high probability state is reached until the start of the next jackpot game. It may be configured as a game machine in which control to the probability state continues (so-called variable probability loop type machine) or a falling machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a game machine in which a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured such that a big winning game (second type big winning game) is executed when a game ball entering the big winning opening by executing the small winning game passes through a specific area in the big winning opening. . A jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area in a big winning opening. It may be configured as a two-type jackpot game.

In the fourth embodiment, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and when transitioning from the high probability base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state (see FIG. 51), or the low probability base state (advantageous game state ) to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous game state shifts to the normal game state, but simply when the advantageous game state ends. For example, when moving from a high-probability base state (advantageous playing state) to a low-probability-high base state, or when shifting from a high-probability-high base state to a high-probability-low base state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. You can do it.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, it is assumed that there were 4 (predetermined number), which is the maximum number of special figures 2 reserved, when shifting from the high probability high base state to the normal game state. The lottery of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the lottery of the special figure 1, and is set more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1. - 特許庁In this case, when the high probability/high base state shifts to the normal game state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the player is still in an advantageous state. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous game state until all the special figure 2 reserves (special figure 2 remaining reserves) remaining when the game state is shifted to the normal game state are consumed. Then, when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested (when all the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 remaining reservation are completed), the over prize ball prevention function operates (game may be disabled) (see FIG. 67). In addition, the special figure 1 lottery is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 lottery, and the order in which the game ball wins the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 A lottery or a lottery of the special figure 2 may be executed.

In particular, it is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, and when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2, a 2 type big win game is practically always executed (a game ball can pass through a specific area). 67, as shown in FIG. 67, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function operates when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested in the normal game state. Even if it shifts from a high base state (time saving state) to a normal game state, it is because 2 types of jackpot games are very easy to be performed until all special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested. That is, if the game becomes unexecutable due to the actuation of the over-prize preventing function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance of winning the second kind of jackpot game is lost, which makes it difficult for the player. It should be noted that the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending is not limited to four, for example, may be one, it can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize ball prevention function operates is when the high-probability-high base state ends or when the low-probability-high base state ends. However, the over-prizing preventing function may be activated only when the high-probability/high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends. Also, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state continues for a certain period of time, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, the number of extra balls may be 80000 or more, and the over-prize preventing function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, for example, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 80000 or more, the over-prized ball prevention function may be activated.

In the fourth embodiment, the first reset condition (see FIG. 52A) is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed down, or the second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When reset condition 2 (see FIG. 52(B)) is established, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, or when the number of difference balls becomes 80000 or more, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. When shifting from the guaranteed high base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, the number of difference balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends, so only when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 (reference number) during the rush state in one time , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, when shifting from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high-probability-low base state to a normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. . Further, the difference number may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, one hour), the number of difference balls may be reset. In this case, if the specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the number of difference balls, it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from reaching 80000 or more for a while. Note that the specific time described above is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. Further, for example, the difference ball number may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference number of balls without forcing the staff of the game hall to perform any operation. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 am, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of difference balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 8). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference ball number can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or may be arranged on a dedicated board.

In the fourth embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed by the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed by the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference ball number on the display device 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display device 300 (see FIG. 9). In this case, for example, when the number of difference balls is 0 to 50000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display device 8 or 7 segment display 300, and the number of difference balls is 50001 to 70000. If it is (second range), display the second mode on the display device 8 or 7-segment display 300, and if the number of difference balls is 70001 to 80000 (third range), display The third mode may be displayed on the device 8 or 7 segment display 300 . Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of difference balls (or information on the number of total winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the microcomputer 121 for effect control performs image display. A display means such as the device 50 may display the number of difference balls. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the sub-control board 120 information on the number of awarded balls paid out (or the number of awarded balls to be paid out) and information on detection of the outlet sensor. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 may calculate the number of difference balls based on these pieces of information, and display the number of difference balls on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like.

Also, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference ball number on the 7-segment display 300 as in the modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, information on the number of difference balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four storage areas of the number of difference number storage section 107c of the non-erased storage section 107, respectively. . In the first storage area, the number of difference balls up to the present time since the power was turned on this time is stored. In the second storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) to when the power was cut off last time is stored. In the third storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times before) to when the power was cut off two times before is stored. In the 4th (N) storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two last times (3 times before) to when the power was cut off two times before last is stored. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the fourth storage area is erased. It should be noted that the information on the difference number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if the RAM clear is executed.

Then, in this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The number of difference balls stored in the th storage area is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300 by switching in order in units of 1,000 balls. be. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 69(A). This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69B, for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base one time ago was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base 3 times ago is 38%.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "cL20" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 69(E). As a result, it is indicated that the difference number of balls from the time when the power is turned on to the present time is 20000. Next, as shown in FIG. 69F, for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the last time (one time before) when the power was turned on until the last time when the power was cut off is "0". When the number of difference balls is smaller than "0" because the total number of shot balls is larger than the total number of prize balls, "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 69G, for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time the power was turned on the second time (two times before) until the power was cut off the time before last is 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 69(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time when the power was turned on two times before last (three times before) to when the power was turned off two times before last is 48,000. After that, FIGS. 69A to 69H are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the modified example described above, each time the power is turned off and on (returned on), the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N) storage area. is erased. However, each time the RAM is cleared, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the 4th (N) storage area may be erased. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined specified time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured difference ball number is shifted and stored, and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference number of balls that has been played may be deleted. It should be noted that N described above can be appropriately changed as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 69, the 7-segment display 300 automatically switches the display of the number of difference balls every 5 seconds. However, the display of the difference number may be switched by operating a predetermined operating means such as pressing the RAM clear switch 191 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 . Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the number of difference balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means.

In the fourth embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. However, the effect mode indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function is about to be activated is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 70000") or a special light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 are close to the operation of the over-prize prevention function. may be shown. Further, as the number of difference balls increases, it may be indicated that the over-prize prevention function is approaching the operation by means of an effect mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the fourth embodiment, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number), the game can be stopped by the effect mode shown in FIG. 54(B). However, the effect mode indicating the situation in which the game may be stopped is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 54(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 80,000") or a special light emitting mode of the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, or the like may be used to indicate a situation in which the game may be stopped. good.

In the fourth embodiment, when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, the game cannot be executed by the effect mode shown in FIG. 53(A). However, the effect mode indicating the state in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 53(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "game cannot be executed" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "game cannot be executed") may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

In the fourth embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. However, even if the information on the number of difference balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erasing storage section) of the game RAM 104 and the information on the number of difference balls is cleared when the RAM is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls include the execution of RAM clearing, or the reset condition for resetting the number of difference balls is limited to the execution of RAM clearing. Also good.

In the fourth embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 57), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (the process of step S109, see FIG. 57) for making it stop was also stopped. However, when the over-prize prevention function operates, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the shooting control process. However, in this case, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotating operation to the handle 72k even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible for the player to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Further, for example, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, the game ball may still flow down the game area 6 at the timing when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game ball may enter various prize-winning holes and give the player a prize. There is a problem that spheres can be given. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible to ensure that no prize balls are awarded to the player after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of shot balls based on the detection of the outlet sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detect winning to various winning holes , the total number of shot balls may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, based on the detection of this sensor, the total The number of shot balls may be counted.

In the fourth embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, the over-price announcement image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(A). However, regardless of the number of difference balls, the game cannot be executed on the condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the customer waiting effect, the effect during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect), the notice effect accompanying the variable effect, etc. A presentation explaining what will happen may be executed. This is because such an effect makes it possible to inform the players and employees of the game parlors in advance that the pachinko game machine has a function of preventing over-prized balls.

In the fourth embodiment, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of fired balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are stored in the non-erase storage section 107 of the game RAM 104, so that even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are not deleted. However, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls in a non-volatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the game RAM 104, Even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls may not be erased.

In the fourth embodiment, the difference ball number is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the start timing of counting the number of difference balls may be from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal game state). In this case, the minus amount of the number of difference balls (that is, the total number of shot balls) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the fourth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls separately, and subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls to calculate the number of difference balls. . However, the difference ball number may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the difference ball number. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Also, each time a game ball is shot (every time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference ball counter is decremented. In this way, the number of difference balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the differential ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more so as not to become negative. Then, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the fourth embodiment, the over-prize preventing function is activated under the condition that the number of difference balls (specific count number) is 80000 (reference number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number), which is the reference for activating the over-prize prevention function, is not limited to 80000, and may be 50000, 100000, or 120000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the over-prize preventing function is the number of difference balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. However, the specific count number can be changed as appropriate if it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player from the viewpoint of not giving excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measurement number may be a game state such as a jackpot game state, or a difference ball count limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. Also, for example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive period. It can be. Also, for example, the specific count may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period of time such as a consecutive game period.

In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko machine in which the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko gaming machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine that can circulate and enter the game area again after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area. In this case, a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170 is provided with a 7-segment display. Therefore, the 7-segment display may display the number of difference balls (specific count number). In addition, a 6-digit 7-segment display that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door. Therefore, the 6-digit 7-segment display may display the difference ball number (specific count number). It should be noted that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting.

<Invention shown in the fourth embodiment>
The above-described fourth embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention according to means X1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific measurement number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000), and the advantageous gaming state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 51), the game is disabled (stops game control processing and launch control processing).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state for the player, and there is no particular big disadvantage for the player. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means X2 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) shifts to a normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention according to means X3 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
The specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process that has been suspended by a predetermined number (for example, four) when the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 67) when the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the hit determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number. In this case, it is regarded as a substantially advantageous game state until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number is completed in the normal game state, and the game is stopped when the substantially advantageous game state ends. Is possible.

The invention according to means X4 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with an entrance (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling a ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering opening than in a normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball-entering state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-enter state in which the game ball enters the ball-entering opening more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the easy-ball-entering state ends and before the number of balls in his possession decreases.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means X1 to X4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player in the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. 2, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention according to means Y1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific count becomes a predetermined reference number (80000) or more, the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) (see FIG. 51),
Based on the establishment of the reset conditions not triggered by power-on (the first reset condition that the special reset switch 181 is pressed and the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specific measurement number measured This gaming machine is characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 52A and 52B).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing the game before the specific count reaches the reference number, and the player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific count becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the measured specific number of measurements is erased based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by power-on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

The invention according to means Y2 is
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 52(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a certain player has finished playing, the employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, and the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The game control means can be controlled to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 52(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, assuming that the player has changed, the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is to shift from an advantageous game state (high odds/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal game state (see FIG. 68(A)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player shifts to the normal game state, the measured specific counting number is erased. In this way, once the situation in which the advantageous game state continues is over, it is possible to prevent the specific count number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means Y5 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state (see FIG. 68(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific time continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player does not last for a while. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific number of measurements from exceeding the reference number for a while by erasing the specific number of measurements.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Y1 to Y5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of specific measurements exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement measured based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. The difference is that the number is erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention according to means Z1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment) comprising an operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 191),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
A game characterized by erasing game information related to the game (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but not erasing the specific measurement number that has been measured. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when the employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, the game information related to the game is erased, but the measured specific measurement number is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the game state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible not to erase the measured specific measurement number.

The invention according to means Z2 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1,
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the measured specific count can be erased (see FIG. 52(A)) based on the operation of the special operation means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the measured specific measurement number is erased by the employee of the gaming arcade operating the special operation means. As a result, even if the game state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the game hall can erase the measured specific measurement number at an arbitrary timing.

The invention according to means Z3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured specific count can be erased.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the measured specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the measured specific number of measurements without having the employee of the game arcade perform any operation.

The invention according to means Z4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific number of measurements is stored in order by being classified for each predetermined period (period from power-on to power-off) from 1st to N (4)th,
Along with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is erased, and the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined period is erased. , and the measurement of the specific number of times in the first predetermined period is started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to store the specific counts for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth. On top of that, as the number of specific measurements in the N-th predetermined period is erased, the number of specific measurements in the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is the number of specific measurements in the second to N-th predetermined periods Shifted as counts. Then, the measurement of the specific number of measurements for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the number of specific measurements for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth without having the staff of the game arcade operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Z1 to Z4 is that the game control means can measure a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been made is not erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

12. Fifth Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 78. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and explanations thereof are omitted. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) side to intentionally set a game state advantageous to the player.

Incidentally, the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery related to the second start port 12), a small win game for opening the second big winning port 15 is executed, and a small win When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during the game (when there is a so-called V passage), a jackpot game including a round game for opening the first big winning hole 14 is executed a plurality of times. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, the types of stop symbols in the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment determines the special symbol random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. It determines whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the first start port 11, the jackpot (so-called 1st kind jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but the small You don't get elected. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the small hit is always won. That is, in the lottery of the special figure 2, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is not elected, and there is no loss.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won, the pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is determined according to the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. to decide. In the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_jackpot design S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 does not include the jackpot (1 type jackpot). If the types of the winning jackpot symbols are different, the opening patterns of the jackpot openings in the first jackpot game and the settings regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 71). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment determines the type of the small winning symbol by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. do. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" is determined, and at a rate of 20%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern t" is determined. If the type of the winning small winning pattern is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game or the two-kind big winning game and the setting regarding the game state after the big winning game are different (see FIG. 71). This point will be described later.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment determines that neither the big win nor the small win has been won (that is, when it determines that it is lost), the symbol type random number is changed to the losing symbol type shown in FIG. 70 (D). By judging according to the judgment table, the type of the missing symbol is determined. In the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern S" is decided, at a rate of 10%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern T" is decided, at a rate of 10%, " Special figure 1 _ Losing pattern U” is determined. In addition, loss is not included in the result of the lottery of special figure 2. The difference in the types of the losing symbols affects the setting regarding the game state after the stopping and displaying of the losing symbols (see FIG. 72). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether to The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is a normal time-saving state, which will be described later. When it is not in the normal working hours state, the probability of being determined to be reachable is higher than when it is in the normal working hours state.

Next, types of big wins, types of small wins, and types of losses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. As described above, the results of the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". At the time of the "big win", the special figure display 81 stops displaying the "big win pattern". The jackpot patterns include "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T". Also, at the time of "small win", the "small win symbol" is stop-displayed on the special figure display 81. - 特許庁The small winning design includes "special figure 2_small winning design s" and "special figure 2_small winning design t". At the time of "missing", the special symbol display 81 stops displaying the "losing symbol". There are “special figure 1_losing pattern S”, “special figure 1_losing pattern T”, and “special figure 1_losing pattern U” as the losing pattern.

When a special symbol lottery wins a big win, a "big win game" is executed to open the first big win port 14 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed big win symbol. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open the second big winning hole 15 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small win symbols. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning pattern. A "jackpot game" to be opened is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot winning is called a first-class jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing through the specific area 16 is called a second-class jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

In addition, in this form, the small winning game is a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 15, the opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game is started, and the small winning opening game is completed. Later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 81a) that can be won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 71, "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum open time is 29.5 seconds. The game state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game state at the time of winning.

Here, the game state of this embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment can be controlled to a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which the settings related to the ease of entering the second start port 12 are different from the non-time-saving state. In the time-saving state, there is a normal time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second start port 12, and a slight time-saving state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second start port 12 than in the normal time-saving state (non- normal working hours). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 in the slightly reduced working hours state is not much different from the non-working reduced state. That is, in this form, the normal time-saving state is a high-base state in which a large number of balls can be expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time-saving state and the non-time-saving state are unlikely to enter the second starting port 12. Low base state. Details of the game state will be described later.

The game state after the jackpot game when the ``jackpot pattern S'' is won is a non-time-saving state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a normal time-saving state, but the game state at the time of winning is a slight time-saving state. If so, it's a very short time. The number of times of time saving in the slightly time saving state is set to 800 times. Time saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the minute time saving state reaches 800 times, the minute time saving state ends. In this case, it is set to a non-time saving state.

On the other hand, the time saving state after the jackpot game when winning the "jackpot pattern T" is a non-time saving state, regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state. state.

Further, when a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game of opening the second big prize opening 15 once is executed. When the game ball enters the second big winning port 15 opened by the small winning game and passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, the big winning is won, and the first prize is awarded continuously. A jackpot game (two kinds of jackpot game) for opening the big winning hole 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big prize opening 15 as the small jackpot game corresponds to the first R. In addition, if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. A jackpot game or a small hit game may be called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this form, as shown in FIG. 71, there are two types of small winning patterns (small winning patterns stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 81b) that can be won in the special figure 2 lottery. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" and "special figure 2_small winning pattern t".

The “small winning symbol s” and “small winning symbol t” are small winnings that can always pass through the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly. That is, in this form, the small hit election based on the lottery of the special figure 2 has substantially the same meaning as the big hit election.

In the small winning game based on the small winning symbols of each type, the second big winning opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as the game is played correctly, it is possible to win a plurality of prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open. It is controlled to the passage permitting state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In the jackpot game (two-type jackpot game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, even in the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern s", the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" Also in the game, the first big winning port 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

The game state after the end of the two types of jackpot games based on the "small winning pattern s" is a non-short-time state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-short-time state or a short-time state, and a normal short-time state if it is a short-time state. state. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the game state after the end of the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" is any of the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state at the time of winning. It is in a non-short-time state. It should be noted that the lottery of the special figure 2 in this form is mainly in the normal time saving state, and there is almost no lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state.

Further, when it is determined that the game is lost as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the lost symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 72, there are three types of loss patterns (loss patterns stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 81a) determined by the special figure 1 lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, it is determined to be one of "special figure 1_losing pattern S", "special figure 1_losing pattern T", and "special figure 1_losing pattern U". In addition, it will not be determined to be lost in the lottery of special figure 2.

"Special figure 1_loss pattern S" is a normal loss that does not affect the transition of the game state, but "special figure 1_loss pattern T" and "special figure 1_loss pattern U" serve as control triggers for the time saving state. It is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the stop display of the losing symbol to a time saving state. However, if it is already in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state or slight time-saving state) at the control timing to the time-saving state based on the special loss (that is, if the time-saving flag is ON), the setting of the game state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the game state after the stop display of the “losing pattern T” in the non-time saving state is the normal time saving state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. In addition, the game state after the stop display of the “loss pattern U” in the non-time-saving state is a slightly time-saving state, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 800 times.

<Game state>
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbols in the non time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states of the non-time saving state, the normal time saving state, and the slight time saving state. In other words, in any game state, the normal symbol lottery is determined to be almost hit. In addition, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

In addition, in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state, slight time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 73(B), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than that of the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. It should be noted that the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

In addition, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 73(C), the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game becomes longer than the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this form, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, but it is 2.5 seconds in the normal time saving state and 0.1 seconds in the slight time saving state is.

Also, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal pattern lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is as long as 60 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.05 seconds once. and very short time. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, even if the game is played in the right-handed manner (the manner in which the game ball can pass through the gate 13), it is hardly expected to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is almost a win, the normal symbol fluctuation time is as short as 1 second, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time-saving state, winning a prize to the electric chew 12D can occur frequently by playing the game with the right hand. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a game state in which it is easier to win the electric chew 12D than in the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slightly reduced time state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal symbol fluctuation time is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. One time is short. Therefore, in the micro time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern fluctuation time and stop time, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in a non-time saving state In comparison, although the setting is such that it is easy to win the electric chew 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D even if the game is played with the right hand.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, it is not expected to win the electric chew 12D even if the player hits to the right, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the left. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, hitting to the right often results in winning prizes in the electric chew 12D, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the right. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

Like the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a game state in which it is easy to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-working time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the electric chew 12D than the normal time saving state. It is the game state of the setting. In addition, the slightly reduced working hours state is a game state closer to a non-working reduced state than the normal reduced working hours state, since winning of the electric chew 12D cannot be expected. In addition, the normal time saving state is an example of the specific game state, and the non-time saving state and the minute time saving state are examples of the non-specific game state.

By the way, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called "low base state". A short time state is also an example of a "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being performed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state.

The winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game performance.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, determination of a special figure variation pattern (variation pattern of special symbols) will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment determines a special figure variation pattern according to a different special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state and the normal time saving state (see FIG. 74).

First, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be described based on FIG. 74(A). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The lottery result of the special figure 1 has a big hit and a loss. In the case of a big hit, select either a special figure variation pattern P80 to perform SP reach or a special figure variation pattern P81 to perform normal reach without developing into SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of losing, if it is a losing pattern S that is usually losing or a losing pattern U that is a control trigger for a minute time saving state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special figure variation pattern that performs SP reach Select either P82 or special figure variation pattern P83 that performs normal reach without developing into SP reach, and when it is determined that there is no reach, depending on the number of retained balls, special figure variation in which reach is not formed Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing pattern U is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the slight time-saving state, but in this form, the slight time-saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, so the losing pattern U is displayed in the non-time-saving state. When pulled, the same special figure variation pattern as when the losing pattern S is pulled is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stop pattern is a loss pattern T that triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special figure variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH rush effect is selected. When the losing pattern T is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The RUSH rush production is a production that suggests shifting to a normal working hours state. The RUSH rush effect will be described later.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the minute time saving state will be described based on FIG. 74(B). The short time state is a game state that is least advantageous for the player in this form. That is, in the present embodiment, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state (normal game state). In the slightly reduced working hours state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, either the special figure variation pattern P90 which performs SP reach or the special figure variation pattern P91 which performs normal reach without developing into SP reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is lost, no matter what the lost pattern is, when it is determined that there is a reach, the special figure fluctuation pattern P92 to perform SP reach, or to SP reach Select any of the special figure variation patterns P93 that perform normal reach without developing, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special figure variation pattern P94 or P95 in which reach is not formed according to the number of retained balls. . Since the game state is not newly set even if the special losing (losing pattern T, losing pattern U) is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, when the special losing is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, the normal losing (losing pattern S) is drawn. I am trying to select the same special figure variation pattern as when.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be described based on FIG. 75(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player in this form. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, a small win is always won in the lottery of the special figure 2, and V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time-saving state means acquisition of the next big hit game (so-called Renso determination).

In the normal time-saving state, the game is played by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 75(C), when the special figure 2 lottery is made in the normal time saving state, the special figure variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the special figure 2 variation pattern. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, immediate hit production is executed. In the immediate hit performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (double number) indicating winning as soon as the ready-to-win is formed within the fluctuation time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of game control microcomputer>
Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a game state management process shown in FIG. 75 is performed instead of the game state management process (FIG. 64) explained in the fourth embodiment. In addition, since the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is not set to the high probability state, it does not perform processing related to the probability variation flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the gaming state management process (S1602) in the fifth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , If it is ON, the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of times of special figure fluctuation (variation display of special symbols) executed during the time saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and the value of the time saving counter is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S2103). If not "0", the process proceeds to step S2110, and if "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), the game state flag update process (S2105) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110.

In the game state flag update process (S2105), the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. As shown in the table in FIG. 75, the value of the game state flag is set to "0" if it is a non-time saving state, if it is a normal time saving state it is set to "1", If it is a slight time saving state " 2”. In this game state flag update process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned OFF, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "0" corresponding to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (loss pattern T or loss pattern U), the process proceeds to step S2130, but if it is a special loss, the time saving flag is turned on (S2112), and the number of time saving times according to the type of loss pattern (Fig. 72 See) is set to the time saving counter (S2113), the game state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this game state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag is turned ON based on the lost pattern T, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "1" corresponding to the normal time saving state, and the lost pattern U If the time saving flag is turned ON based on, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the game state flag to "1", the game state is controlled to the normal time-saving state, and by setting the value of the game state flag to "2", the game state is controlled to be the slight time-saving state. . It should be noted that each time-saving state in the present form, that the special figure fluctuation of the predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed end by the establishment of either end condition .

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the time saving state is controlled based on the special loss is limited to when it is a non-working time saving state (when YES in step S2110). That is, even if a special loss is pulled in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state management process (S1602), the process (steps S2101 to S2105) relating to whether to end the time saving state is performed first, and then the processing relating to whether to control the time saving state based on the special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, in the variation of special figure 1, which is the final variation of the minute time saving state, when the special loss is stopped and displayed, the process of steps S2101 to S2105 is transferred from the minute time saving state to the non-time saving state, Steps S2110 to S2114 It will be transferred from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by the processing of . In addition, the processing of steps S2110 to S2114 is configured to be performed prior to the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, so that even if a special loss is pulled in the final variation of the time saving state, it may be configured not to be controlled to a new time saving state. .

At step S2130, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state designation command including the information of the game state flag (that is, the information of the current game state) to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. FIG. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 120 is notified of the current game state information.

<Game flow in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the flow of game progress in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the game state that is not most advantageous to the player among the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state, and the normal working time saving state cannot be shifted to the normal working time saving state even if the losing pattern U is drawn. It is in a short time state. The non-time-saving state is a game state more advantageous than the slight time-saving state in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern U. In addition, since the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of a jackpot game based on the lottery of special figure 2 is substantially confirmed, it is the most It is an advantageous playing state.

In this form, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state. As shown in FIG. 76, when it is a slightly short time state, the production mode is set to the normal production mode (detailed later). In the short time state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The pachinko game machine of this form is configured so as not to directly shift from the minute time-saving state to the normal time-saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, the game proceeds with the aim of first shifting to a non-time-saving state. When the "big hit symbol S" is won in the short working time state, the game state after the big winning game is again set to the short working time state. On the other hand, when the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the non-time-saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special figure variation becomes 800 times (the number of times of time saving in the time saving state) without winning the jackpot in the time saving state, it is set to the non-time saving state.

The non-time-saving state is a game state that can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the game states that are advantageous for the player. When it is a non-time saving state, production mode is set to chance production mode (detailed later). In the non-time saving state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this form, you will win a special loss with a probability of 1/5 in the lottery of special figure 1. At this time, it is distributed to the losing pattern T (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 1/2, and it is distributed to the losing pattern U (the pattern that triggers the slight time saving state) with a probability of 1/2. When the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing pattern U, the game is played aiming at the shift to the non-time-saving state again in order to shift to the slight time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing design T, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The normal time saving state is a game state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially determined. When it is a normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (detailed later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. In the lottery of special figure 2, a small hit is always won. At this time, it is distributed to the small winning pattern s (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 4/5, and to the small winning pattern t (the pattern that triggers the non-time saving state) with a probability of 1/5. be done. When the winning small win in the normal time saving state is the small winning pattern s, the normal time saving state is set again after the two-kind big winning game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called big win consecutive game is decided.

On the other hand, when the small hit won in the normal time-saving state is the small-hit symbol t, the non-time-saving state is set after the two-kind jackpot game based on V passage. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing pattern T can be drawn, it can be returned to the normal time-saving state. On the other hand, when the losing pattern U is drawn, the game shifts to a slight time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it is set to the non-time saving state once without directly shifting to the slight time saving state. Therefore, the player can expect to be set to the normal time-saving state again, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the non-time-saving state, when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, even when the jackpot pattern S is drawn or when the jackpot pattern T is drawn, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is non-time-saving. state. As a result, the player is prevented from being discouraged by being set in a slight time-reduction state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal non-time-reduction state, even though the player has won a big win.

Here, the game state when the power is turned on will be described. When the power is turned on without the operation of the RAM clear switch 191, the game state at power-on takes over the game state at power-off. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off in the short working hours state after closing the shop on the previous day, the game state when the power is turned on when the shop opens remains in the short working hours state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 191, the flags and the like are initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 76, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the game state becomes a non-time-saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing pattern T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment can be set to an advantageous state for the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming hall (hall). That is, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played a game since the RAM is cleared by an employee of the gaming hall, etc., can use the pachinko machine of this embodiment when the amusement hall opens. You can expect to play the game machine. That is, it can be expected to improve the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Production example in the fifth embodiment>
Next, an example of an effect in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. First, the presentation mode will be explained.

The effect modes of this embodiment include a "normal effect mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 77(A), and a daytime background image as shown in FIG. is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the display section 50a. "RUSH production mode" displayed in is included.

The normal production mode (FIG. 77(A)) is a production mode that is set in the case of a slight time reduction state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form is a game state advantageous for a player as mentioned above, this slight time-saving state substantially functions as a normal game state. The setting of the normal production mode (in other words, the display of the background image in the daytime) functions as a suggestion that the time is short.

Chance production mode (Fig. 77 (B)) is production mode that is set in the non-time saving state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form can shift to the normal time-saving state based on the lost pattern T, it is a chance for the player to shift to the normal time-saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character of the chance) functions as a suggestion that it is in a non-time saving state. Moreover, since it sets to a non-time-saving state when RAM clear is made, the setting of chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that RAM clear was made.

RUSH production mode (Fig. 77 (C)) is a production mode that is set in the normal working hours state. When it is controlled to the normal time-saving state, the execution of the 2 types of jackpot games based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH production mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is the normal time-saving state. In addition to functioning as a suggestion of the fact, it also functions as a suggestion of finalizing the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time-saving state, the game is progressed with the aim of winning a prize to the second start port 12 by hitting to the right. A right-handed shot image G108 informing that the player should hit is displayed in the upper right part of the display section 50a.

Next, the advance notice effect in the normal effect mode will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a dialogue announcement effect for displaying a predetermined character together with a dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Dialogue The type of dialogue in the notice production includes dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high (such as "chance") and dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher (such as "hot heat"). , There is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko machine of this form is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the effect shown in FIG. 77(D) as the dialogue announcement effect of the specific dialogue. The production shown in FIG. 77(D) is a speech announcement production in which a mini-character with an angel as a motif says, "It might be easier to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning." Equipped with an advantageous setting function, in other words, it is possible to grasp that the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and that there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a speech announcement effect for a specific speech functions as an explanation effect for explaining to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation of the fact that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily have to be performed as a speech announcement effect, and may be performed as an ending effect accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting effect. .

Next, the RUSH rush effect performed when shifting from the non-time saving state to the normal working time saving state will be described. When the winning design T is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure variation pattern P86 (see FIG. 74(A)). And the production control microcomputer 121, when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, performs the fluctuation production accompanied by the RUSH rush production. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH rush production (FIGS. 78(A) and (B)), and then sets the middle production pattern EZ2 to the special pattern TZ. Stop display with a special eye. In this form, the special symbol TZ is an image containing characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (that is, RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination game state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific stitches of "1, 3, 5". When the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes in this manner, it is suggested that the game is shifted to the normal time-saving state (RUSH performance mode). That is, the fact that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a special eye is a production that suggests to the player that the shift to the normal time-saving state (pulling the losing pattern T) or a shift to the RUSH production mode. It functions as a production that suggests to do. Incidentally, the special stitches of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 and the specific stitches of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the Fifth Embodiment>
As explained in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, an employee of the game hall performs a RAM clear operation (ON operation of the power switch 193 while pressing the RAM clear switch 191). It is possible to set the time-saving state, and the non-time-saving state is advantageous to the player in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern T. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible for an employee of the game arcade to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, and an improvement in service to the player can be expected.

Moreover, according to the pachinko game machine of 5th Embodiment, RAM clear operation for setting to a non-time-saving state is operation possible only at the time of power-on. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the game state of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state when the power is turned on to open the game arcade. Therefore, it is possible to guide a player who expects to play a game in a non-time-saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the opening of the amusement arcade.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment, when it is set to the non-time saving state, it is set to the chance production mode (Fig. 77 (B)), so that the RAM clear operation is performed by the employees of the game hall. It is possible for a player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine that has been used, and thus it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, it is possible to suggest, by means of a dialogue announcement effect, that there is a possibility that a game state that is advantageous to the player may be set by the operation of an employee of the gaming parlor or the like. (See FIG. 77(D)). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the game machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Modified example of the fifth embodiment>
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the fifth embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the fifth embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. Also, the configuration included in the pachinko machine PY1 of the first embodiment and its modifications (including the second embodiment and the third embodiment), and / or the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment and The configuration included in the modified example can be employed in the gaming machine grasped from the fifth embodiment and its modified example to the extent that it does not interfere with the game.

In the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a short time state, the game state after the big win game is not set to the normal short time state, but the winning in the short time state is controlled to the normal short time state. You may provide the jackpot pattern used as an opportunity.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times of time saving in the time saving state is set to 800 times, but the number of times of time saving in the time saving state is set to 800 times. A plurality of types of unsuccessful patterns may be provided, and the number of times of time saving in the slight time saving state may be varied according to the types of unsuccessful patterns. For example, if the time saving state is set based on a certain lost pattern, the number of times of time saving is set to a small number such as 30 times, and if the time saving state is set based on another losing pattern, the time saving number of times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is set to be large, it is possible to provide a slightly time-saving state that easily shifts to a non-time-saving state and a state that does not easily shift to the non-time-saving state, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

In the fifth embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it does not move directly to the short working time state, but is configured to be set to the non-short working time state once, but it is possible to directly move to the short working time state. There is a configuration (a configuration in which the game state after the jackpot game based on winning in the normal time-saving state is set to a short-time state, or a configuration in which the normal time-saving state is completed by digesting the number of time-saving states). good.

In the fifth embodiment, setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG containing the character of the chance) suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state, but suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state ( Suggestion that it is a game machine with RAM cleared) may be performed by other effects such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in a game state other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the production (suggestion production) that suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state does not have to be always performed if it is in a non-time-saving state, and is executed only when the production execution lottery is won It may be something that is done. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, so the effect that suggests the non-time saving state is executed only when the lottery is won. When it is configured to do, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the non-time-saving state has been controlled to the slight time-saving state based on the losing pattern U, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Since the state in which the band image OG including the character of chance is not displayed in the chance effect mode is the same as the normal effect mode, it can be said that both are set to the same effect mode.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state by turning on the power with RAM clear, when it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (state in which the jackpot game is being executed) Also, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being consumed in a slight time-saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. It is set to the chance production mode only when it is controlled to the time saving state, and when it is controlled to the non-time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game state, or when the number of time saving times has been consumed in the slight time saving state Non-time saving When it is controlled to the state, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being digested in a slight time-saving state, It is good also as a structure set to the same production mode as a time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 191 was a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation without using the RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation). For example, it is good also as a structure set to a non-time-saving state by providing the exclusive switch for setting to a non-time-saving state, and pushing the said exclusive switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be set to a non-time-saving state by pressing a dedicated switch during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting effect is being performed). It should be noted that the dedicated switch is preferably mounted on the main control board 100 or otherwise provided at a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it. That is, like the RAM clear switch 191, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 2 is opened.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, it is configured as a so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine capable of executing a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15, but the so-called "ST machine" , or a "probability variable loop machine", it may be a game machine of a type other than a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the case of a ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "symbol variable machine" that determines the transition to a high probability state with a high jackpot winning probability based on the type of special symbol that has been won, or a V attacker (specific area It may be a so-called “V probability changer” in which a transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area in a large winning device having a . In addition, when configured as a "ST machine" or a "variable loop machine", it is configured to win a jackpot in both the special 1 lottery and the special 2 lottery, and the special 2 lottery is better than the special 1 lottery. A lottery may be advantageous in that a jackpot game with a large number of obtainable prize balls can be easily executed and the game state after the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Also, even if a special loss is drawn in a high-probability state, the setting of the game state is not changed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above-described form, parameters in various time-saving states (normal pattern fluctuation time, stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each big winning symbol, each small winning symbol, and each losing symbol can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but depending on the game characteristics to be realized, it may be a so-called Hanemono (2 type machine) without a 1 type jackpot. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 may be configured so that the so-called "direct hit jackpot" cannot be won.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the upper limit number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time saving state (time saving number of times) is counted even if the variable display of special figure 1 is performed or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed Although it was set as the total upper limit execution number, apart from this total upper limit execution number, special figure 1 upper limit execution number that counts only the variation display of special figure 1, special figure that only the variation display of special figure 2 is counted FIG. 2 may be configured so that an upper limit number of times of execution is provided, and the time saving state ends when any number of times is satisfied. In addition, special figure 1 upper limit execution frequency and special figure 2 upper limit execution frequency can be set to a value different from the total upper limit execution frequency. In addition, without providing the total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special number 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 Only an upper limit number of times of execution may be provided, and when this number of times is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated.

<Invention shown in the fifth embodiment>
Inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described fifth embodiment and its modifications. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention according to means S1 is
A prize winning opening (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12) into which game balls can enter,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for setting a game state based on the entry of a game ball into the winning hole;
With production control means (production control microcomputer 121) for setting the production mode for producing production,
The game state includes a first state (normal time-saving state) in which game balls are likely to enter the winning opening, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which game balls are less likely to enter the winning opening than in the first state. state), and
The game control means may set the second state as the initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the effect control means has a specific mode (chance effect mode) including a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, the display of the strip image OG shown in FIG. 77(B)) as the effect mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting

The invention according to means S2 is
A game machine according to means S1,
In the game state, there is a third state (slight time reduction state) which is different from the second state and in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the winning hole than in the first state,
The game control means can make a special determination of whether or not to set the first state (determination of whether or not to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing pattern T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined when the first state is set in the special determination than the third state.

The invention according to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing pattern U that triggers the transition to the short time state) is established in the second state. there is a
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the specific mode even if the game state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2018-47326, after the jackpot game, it may be controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting port. However, there is room for improvement with respect to the effects in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By installing the improved production, it can be expected to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the invention according to means S provides a game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-47326 that "a game ball enters a winning hole more easily than in the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole." There are times when the difficult second state is set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game through the performance.

13. Other Modified Examples Other modified examples common to the above embodiments will be described below. In the above-described form, the first start port 11 (fixed start port) in which the ease with which the game ball enters does not change, and the second start port 12 (variable start port, electric However, only one of them may be provided.

In the above-described form, the special figure 2 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 1 determination process (the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed preferentially over the variation display of the special figure 1). Special figure 1 determination processing is performed preferentially over special figure 2 determination processing (variation display of special figure 1 is performed preferentially than variation display of special figure 2) It may be configured. In this case, the special figure 1 lottery should be a lottery that is more advantageous than the special figure 2 lottery and makes it easier to win a big hit.

Moreover, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it is also possible to apply it to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth ball game machine. Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game characteristics of the game machine can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. That is, the present invention, if it does not interfere with the game, is a so-called pattern probability machine (a game machine in which the transition to a high probability state is determined based on the type of winning pattern), a so-called V probability machine (specification in the big winning opening) A game machine that controls to a high probability state based on the passage of the area (V area)), a so-called variable loop type game machine (once controlled to a high probability state, control to a high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game game machines), so-called ST machines (game machines that cut the number of times with variable probability), so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machines, Hanemono type game machines, etc.

In the above embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in synchronism with the special symbol variable display. It may be composed of patterns other than three, such as three. For example, you may provide two designs divided by special figure 1 and special figure 2. Moreover, one pattern common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be provided. In these cases, the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 may be used for display, and the sub-control board 120 may be used for control. Further, in areas other than the game area 6 of the game board 1, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As described above, the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

It should be noted that when saying "a state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous game state, advantageous state, or special game state)", not all jackpot game states may correspond to this. For example, the jackpot game state scheduled to be controlled to the high probability state after that corresponds to the "state advantageous to the player", or the jackpot game state in which a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained, such as substantially 10R. may correspond to "a state advantageous to the player". Also, the "state advantageous to the player" may be a high-probability state instead of a jackpot game state, or may be a high-base state (time-saving state). If the "state advantageous to the player" is a high probability state or a high base state (time saving state), various effects that make you expect to become a "state advantageous to the player" are special symbols. The effect is not limited to the effect during the variable display, and the effect may be performed at other timing such as the effect during the jackpot game.

PY1... Pachinko game machine 11... First start port 46... Navel lamp (first light emitting part, specific light emitting part)
48... Chance lamp (second light-emitting part)
50a Display unit 50 Image display device 101 Game control microcomputer 121 Effect control microcomputer HA Hold icon (hold display)
TA … Icon (hold display)

Claims (4)

Controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit that can suggest the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when a prize is won in a predetermined starting hole, the first light emitting unit emits light and the second light emitting unit emits light. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is easier to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher when the second light emitting unit emits light than when the first light emitting unit emits light. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The gaming machine, wherein the first light emitting unit can suggest different expectations depending on the difference in light emission color. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second light-emitting section can suggest different expectations depending on a difference in light-emitting mode other than light-emitting color.

Images